Mercedes Benz 2012 B Class W246 Owners Manual

2015-09-08

: Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2012-B-Class-W246-Owners-Manual-763394 mercedes-benz-2012-b-class-w246-owners-manual-763394 mercedes-benz pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 340 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

B-Class
Operator's Manual
Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are
registered trademarks of Daimler AG.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Prince.
RiPod® and iTunes® are registered
trademarks of Apple Inc.
RLogic7® is a registered trademark of
Harman International Industries.
RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are
registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM radio Inc.
RHD Radio is a registered trademark of
iBiquity Digital Corporation.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are
registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,
LLC.
In this Operator's Manual, you will find the
following symbols:
GWARNING
Warning notes draw your attention to hazards
that endanger your health or life, or the health
or life of others.
HEnvironmental note
Environmental notes provide you with
information on environmentally aware actions
or disposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to
dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
iPractical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
XThis symbol indicates an
instruction that must be followed.
XSeveral of these symbols in
succession indicate an instruction
with several steps.
(Y page) This symbol tells you where you
can find more information about a
topic.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or
an instruction that is continued on
the next page.
Display This font indicates a display in the
multifunction display/COMAND
display.
Parts of the software in the vehicle are
protected by copyright © 2005
The FreeType Project
http://www.freetype.org. All rights
reserved.
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving. For your own safety
and a longer vehicle life, follow the
instructions and warning notices in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage
to the vehicle or personal injury to you or
others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry specification
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RMaintenance Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep printed copies of the documents in the
vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,
always pass the documents on to the new
owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2465840000 É2465840000bËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4
Introduction ......................................... 20
At a glance ........................................... 27
Safety ................................................... 37
Opening and closing ........................... 67
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 85
Lights and windshield wipers ............ 97
Climate control ................................. 117
Driving and parking .......................... 133
On-board computer and displays .... 185
Stowage and features ...................... 235
Maintenance and care ...................... 265
Breakdown assistance ..................... 279
Wheels and tires ............................... 297
Technical data ................................... 327
Contents 3
1, 2, 3 ...
12 V socket
see Sockets
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 201
Function/notes ................................ 59
Important safety notes .................... 59
Warning lamp ................................. 225
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification ................. 123
Active Parking Assist
Canceling ....................................... 176
Detecting parking spaces .............. 173
Display message ............................ 216
Exiting a parking space .................. 175
Function/notes ............................. 173
Important safety notes .................. 172
Parking .......................................... 174
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 64
Adaptive Brake Assist
Function/notes ................................ 61
Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 62
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message ............................ 212
Function/notes ............................. 102
Switching on/off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 197
Additional speedometer ................... 196
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 332
Air bags
Deployment ..................................... 39
Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) ....................................... 42
Important safety notes .................... 41
Knee bag .......................................... 44
Safety guidelines ............................. 40
Side impact air bag .......................... 44
Window curtain air bag .................... 45
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
Air vents
Important safety notes .................. 130
Rear ............................................... 131
Setting ........................................... 130
Setting the center air vents ........... 130
Setting the side air vents ............... 130
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ambient lighting
Setting the brightness (on-board
computer) ...................................... 197
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-theft alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ashtray ............................................... 249
Assistance menu (on-board
computer) .......................................... 194
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ........ 270
Hiding a service message .............. 270
Notes ............................................. 270
Resetting the service interval
display ........................................... 270
Service message ............................ 270
Special service requirements ......... 271
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 65
Function ........................................... 65
Switching off the alarm .................... 65
ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 195
Display message ............................ 215
Function/notes ............................. 180
Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 192
Audio system
see separate operating instructions
Authorized Centers
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshops
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message ............................ 211
see Lights
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop function) .................................... 137
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stop function) .......................... 137
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 99
4Index
Automatic transmission
Automatic drive program ............... 144
Changing gear ............................... 143
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 140
Display message ............................ 220
Drive program display .................... 141
Driving tips .................................... 143
Emergency running mode .............. 147
Engaging drive position .................. 142
Engaging neutral ............................ 141
Engaging reverse gear ................... 141
Engaging the park position ............ 141
Holding the vehicle stationary on
uphill gradients .............................. 143
Kickdown ....................................... 143
Manual drive program .................... 144
Overview ........................................ 140
Problem (malfunction) ................... 147
Program selector button ................ 143
Pulling away ................................... 136
Starting the engine ........................ 135
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 144
Transmission position display ........ 141
Transmission positions .................. 142
Automatic transmission
emergency mode ............................... 147
B
Backup lamp
Changing bulbs .............................. 109
Display message ............................ 211
Bag hook ............................................ 243
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 59
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 70
Important safety notes .................... 70
Replacing ......................................... 70
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 288
Display message ............................ 213
Important safety notes .................. 285
Jump starting ................................. 289
Belt force limiter
Activation ......................................... 49
Function ........................................... 49
Blinds
see Roller sunblind
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 195
Display message ............................ 216
Notes/function .............................. 181
Brake Assist
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Display message ............................ 207
Notes ............................................. 332
Brake lamps
Adaptive ........................................... 62
Changing bulbs .............................. 109
Display message ............................ 209
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 59
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 61
BAS .................................................. 59
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 332
Display message ............................ 201
Driving tips .................................... 154
Important safety notes .................. 154
Maintenance .................................. 155
Parking brake ................................ 150
Warning lamp ................................. 225
Breakdown
see Flat tire
see Towing away/tow-starting
Bulbs
see Changing bulbs
C
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Car
see Vehicle
Care
Carpets .......................................... 277
Car wash ........................................ 271
Display ........................................... 275
Exhaust pipe .................................. 275
Exterior lights ................................ 274
Gear or selector lever .................... 276
Interior ........................................... 275
Matte finish ................................... 273
Notes ............................................. 271
Paint .............................................. 273
Plastic trim .................................... 276
Index 5
Power washer ................................ 272
Rear view camera .......................... 275
Roof lining ...................................... 277
Seat belt ........................................ 277
Seat cover ..................................... 276
Sensors ......................................... 275
Steering wheel ............................... 276
Trim pieces .................................... 276
Washing by hand ........................... 272
Wheels ........................................... 273
Windows ........................................ 274
Wiper blades .................................. 274
Wooden trim .................................. 276
Cargo compartment cover ............... 244
Cargo compartment enlargement ... 240
Important safety notes .................. 240
Notes on use ................................. 242
Cargo compartment floor
Height adjustment ......................... 246
Important safety notes .................. 245
Opening/closing ............................ 246
Stowage well (under) ..................... 245
Cargo net
Attaching ....................................... 245
Important safety information ......... 245
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 243
Car wash (care) ................................. 271
Center console
Lower section .................................. 33
Upper section .................................. 32
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 198
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 68
Changing bulbs
Brake lamps ................................... 109
Cornering light function ................. 108
High-beam headlamps ................... 107
Important safety notes .................. 104
License plate lighting ..................... 111
Low-beam headlamps .................... 107
Overview of bulb types .................. 105
Parking lamps ................................ 108
Rear fog lamp ................................ 109
Removing/replacing the cover
(front wheel arch) .......................... 106
Reversing lamps ............................ 109
Standing lamps (front) ................... 108
Tail lamps ...................................... 109
Turn signals (front) ......................... 108
Turn signals (rear) .......................... 109
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes .................... 57
Rear doors ....................................... 58
Children
In the vehicle ................................... 50
Restraint systems ............................ 50
Child seat
Automatic recognition ..................... 53
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ............................................ 54
On the front-passenger seat ............ 52
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 57
Top Tether ....................................... 55
Cigarette lighter ................................ 250
Climate control
Automatic climate control ............. 119
Automatic climate control (dual-
zone) .............................................. 121
Controlling automatically ............... 125
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 123
Defrosting the windows ................. 127
Defrosting the windshield .............. 127
Important safety notes .................. 118
Indicator lamp ................................ 125
Maximum cooling .......................... 127
Notes on using automatic climate
control ................................... 120, 122
Overview of systems ...................... 118
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 125
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 129
Refrigerant ..................................... 334
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 335
Setting the air distribution ............. 126
Setting the airflow ......................... 126
Setting the air vents ...................... 130
Setting the temperature ................ 125
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ............................................ 129
Switching on/off ........................... 123
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 129
6Index
Switching the rear window
defroster on/off ............................ 128
Switching the ZONE function on/
off .................................................. 126
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 28
see Instrument cluster
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
Display message ............................ 201
Operation/notes .............................. 60
COMAND
see separate operating instructions
Combination switch .......................... 100
Compass
Calibrating ..................................... 264
Calling up ....................................... 263
Setting ........................................... 263
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 189
Convenience closing feature .............. 78
Convenience opening feature ............ 78
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 269
Display message ............................ 212
Filling capacity ............................... 333
Important safety notes .................. 333
Temperature gauge ........................ 186
Warning lamp ................................. 231
Cooling
see Climate control
Cornering light function
Changing bulbs .............................. 108
Display message ............................ 209
Function/notes ............................. 101
Crash-responsive emergency
lighting ............................................... 104
Cruise control
Activation conditions ..................... 158
Cruise control lever ....................... 158
Deactivating ................................... 159
Display message ............................ 218
Driving system ............................... 157
Function/notes ............................. 158
Important safety notes .................. 157
Setting a speed .............................. 159
Storing and maintaining current
speed ............................................. 158
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 248
Important safety notes .................. 247
Rear compartment ......................... 248
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 24
Customer Relations Department ....... 24
D
Dashboard
see Instrument cluster
Dashboard lighting
see Instrument cluster lighting
Data
see Technical data
Daytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 211
Switching on/off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 197
Switching on/off (switch) ................ 99
Dealerships
see Qualified specialist workshop
Declarations of conformity ................. 23
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board
computer) ...................................... 198
Interior lighting .............................. 198
Diagnostics connection ...................... 24
Digital speedometer ......................... 190
DIRECT SELECT lever
see Automatic transmission
Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 275
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 270
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 200
Driving systems ............................. 215
Engine ............................................ 212
General notes ................................ 200
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 200
Lights ............................................. 208
Safety systems .............................. 201
SmartKey ....................................... 223
Tires ............................................... 219
Vehicle ........................................... 220
Distance display (on-board
computer) .......................................... 194
Index 7
Distance recorder ............................. 189
see Odometer
see Trip odometer
Distance warning function
Activating/deactivating ................. 195
Function/notes ................................ 60
Warning lamp ................................. 233
DISTRONIC PLUS
Activation conditions ..................... 161
Cruise control lever ....................... 161
Deactivating ................................... 165
Display message ............................ 217
Displays in the multifunction
display ........................................... 163
Driving tips .................................... 166
Function/notes ............................. 160
Important safety notes .................. 159
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 165
Warning lamp ................................. 233
Doors
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 198
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 74
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) ....................................... 68
Control panel ................................... 35
Display message ............................ 222
Emergency locking ........................... 75
Emergency unlocking ....................... 75
Important safety notes .................... 73
Opening (from inside) ...................... 73
Drinking and driving ......................... 152
Drive program
Automatic ...................................... 144
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 141
Manual ........................................... 144
Driver's door
see Doors
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 271
Symmetrical low beam .................... 98
Driving on flooded roads .................. 156
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 59
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 64
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 61
Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 62
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 59
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 60
Distance warning function ............... 60
Electronic brake force distribution ... 64
ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program) .................................... 62, 63
ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 62
Important safety information ........... 59
Overview .......................................... 58
STEER CONTROL ............................. 64
Driving systems
Active Parking Assist ..................... 172
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 180
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 181
Cruise control ................................ 157
Display message ............................ 215
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 159
HOLD function ............................... 167
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 183
Lane Tracking package .................. 181
PARKTRONIC ................................. 169
Rear view camera .......................... 176
Driving tips
Automatic transmission ................. 143
Brakes ........................................... 154
Break-in period .............................. 134
Checking brake lining thickness .... 155
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 166
Downhill gradient ........................... 154
Drinking and driving ....................... 152
Driving abroad ................................. 98
Driving in winter ............................. 157
Driving on flooded roads ................ 156
Driving on wet roads ...................... 156
Exhaust check ............................... 152
Fuel ................................................ 152
General .......................................... 152
Hydroplaning ................................. 156
Icy road surfaces ........................... 157
Limited braking efficiency on
salted roads ................................... 154
Snow chains .................................. 301
Symmetrical low beam .................... 98
Wet road surface ........................... 154
DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 192
DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 193
8Index
E
EASY-VARIO-PLUS system
Cargo compartment enlargement .. 240
EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Display message ............................ 203
Function/notes ................................ 64
ECO display
Function/notes ............................. 153
On-board computer ....................... 190
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine start .................. 137
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 137
Deactivating/activating ................. 138
General information ....................... 136
Important safety notes .................. 136
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency release
Driver's door .................................... 75
Vehicle ............................................. 75
Emergency spare wheel
General notes ................................ 325
Important safety notes .................. 325
Removing ....................................... 326
Technical data ............................... 326
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation ......................................... 39
Function ........................................... 49
Safety guidelines ............................. 40
Emergency unlocking
Tailgate ............................................ 76
Emissions control
Service and warranty information .... 21
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 231
Display message ............................ 212
ECO start/stop function ................ 136
Engine number ............................... 329
Irregular running ............................ 139
Jump-starting ................................. 289
Starting problems .......................... 139
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 135
Switching off .................................. 150
Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 294
Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) ................... 139
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 268
Additives ........................................ 332
Checking the oil level ..................... 267
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 268
Display message ............................ 214
Filling capacity ............................... 332
Notes about oil grades ................... 332
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 267
Viscosity ........................................ 332
ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program)
Deactivating/activating ................. 194
Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 63
Display message ............................ 201
ETS .................................................. 62
Function/notes ......................... 62, 63
Important safety information ........... 62
Warning lamp ................................. 227
ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 62
Exhaust check ................................... 152
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) 275
Exterior lighting
Setting options ................................ 98
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ......................................... 92
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 93
Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 93
Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 93
Folding in when locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 199
Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 93
Setting ............................................. 93
Storing settings (memory function) .. 95
Storing the parking position ............. 94
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 237
F
Filler cap
see Fuel filler flap
First-aid kit ......................................... 280
Flat tire
MOExtended tires .......................... 281
Index 9
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 281
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 282
see Emergency spare wheel
Floormats ........................................... 264
Fog lamps
Extended range .............................. 102
Switching on/off .............................. 99
Folding table ...................................... 239
Front fog lamps
Display message ............................ 210
Switching on/off .............................. 99
Front-passenger seat
Folding the backrest forward/back 239
Fuel
Additives ........................................ 331
Consumption statistics .................. 189
Displaying the current
consumption .................................. 190
Displaying the range ...................... 190
Driving tips .................................... 152
Fuel gauge ....................................... 29
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 330
Important safety notes .................. 330
Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 330
Problem (malfunction) ................... 149
Refueling ........................................ 147
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 330
Fuel filler flap
Opening/closing ............................ 148
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ...................................... 190
Fuel tank
Capacity ........................................ 330
Problem (malfunction) ................... 149
Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 295
Before changing ............................. 294
Fuse box in the engine
compartment ................................. 294
Fuse box in the front-passenger
footwell .......................................... 295
Important safety notes .................. 294
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ..................... 263
Important safety notes .................. 260
Opening/closing the garage door .. 262
Programming (button in the rear-
view mirror) ................................... 260
Gear or selector lever (cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 276
Genuine parts ...................................... 20
Glove box ........................................... 237
H
Handbrake
see Parking brake
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 101
Display message ............................ 223
Headlamps
Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 269
Cleaning system (function) ............ 101
Cleaning system (notes) ................ 334
Fogging up ..................................... 103
see Automatic headlamp mode
Head restraints
Adjusting ......................................... 89
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 89
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 89
Adjusting (rear) ................................ 90
Installing/removing (rear) ................ 90
Heating
see Climate control
High-beam headlamps
Changing bulbs .............................. 107
Display message ............................ 210
Switching Adaptive Highbeam
Assist on/off ................................. 102
Switching on/off ........................... 100
Hill start assist .................................. 136
HOLD function
Deactivating ................................... 168
Display message ............................ 215
Function/notes ............................. 168
Hood
Closing ........................................... 267
Display message ............................ 222
10 Index
Important safety notes .................. 266
Opening ......................................... 266
Hydroplaning ..................................... 156
I
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 64
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 29
Settings ......................................... 196
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 30
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 186
Interior lighting ................................. 103
Automatic control .......................... 104
Delayed switch-off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 198
Emergency lighting ........................ 104
Manual control ............................... 104
Overview ........................................ 103
Reading lamp ................................. 103
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board
computer) ...................................... 197
J
Jack
Storage location ............................ 280
Using ............................................. 320
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 289
K
Kickdown
Driving tips .................................... 143
Manual drive program .................... 146
Knee bag .............................................. 44
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 195
Display message ............................ 215
Function/information .................... 183
Lane Tracking package ..................... 181
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ................................................ 54
License plate lamp
Changing bulbs .............................. 111
License plate lamp (display
message) ............................................ 210
Light function, active
Display message ............................ 211
Lighting
Light switch ..................................... 98
Lights
Activating/deactivating the
interior lighting delayed switch-off . 198
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 99
Cornering light function ................. 101
Display message ............................ 208
Driving abroad ................................. 98
Fog lamps ........................................ 99
Fog lamps (extended) .................... 102
Hazard warning lamps ................... 101
High beam flasher .......................... 101
High-beam headlamps ................... 100
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 99
Parking lamps ................................ 100
Rear fog lamp ................................ 100
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board
computer) ...................................... 197
Standing lamps .............................. 100
Switching Adaptive Highbeam
Assist on/off ................................. 197
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board computer) 197
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (switch) ...................... 99
Switching the exterior lighting
delayed switch-off on/off (on-
board computer) ............................ 198
Index 11
Switching the surround lighting
on/off (on-board computer) .......... 198
Turn signals ................................... 100
see Changing bulbs
see Interior lighting
Light sensor (display message) ....... 211
Loading guidelines ............................ 236
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic ........................................ 74
Emergency locking ........................... 75
From inside (central locking
button) ............................................. 74
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (on-
board computer) ............................... 199
Low-beam headlamps
Changing bulbs .............................. 107
Display message ............................ 209
Setting for driving abroad
(symmetrical) ................................... 98
Switching on/off .............................. 99
Lumbar support
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar
support ............................................ 90
M
M+S tires ............................................ 300
Maintenance
see ASSYST PLUS
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instructions) 273
mbrace
Call priority .................................... 255
Display message ............................ 207
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 256
Downloading routes ....................... 259
Emergency call .............................. 253
Geo fencing ................................... 259
Important safety notes .................. 251
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 258
MB info call button ........................ 255
Remote vehicle locking .................. 257
Roadside Assistance button .......... 254
Search & Send ............................... 256
Self-test ......................................... 252
Speed alert .................................... 259
System .......................................... 252
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 260
Vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis ....................................... 258
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 257
Mechanical key
Function/notes ................................ 69
Locking vehicle ................................ 75
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 75
Memory card (audio) ......................... 192
Memory function ................................. 95
Message memory (on-board
computer) .......................................... 200
Messages
see Display messages
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 193
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ........................................... 69
MOExtended tires .............................. 281
Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 322
Mounting a new wheel ................... 322
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 319
Raising the vehicle ......................... 320
Removing a wheel .......................... 322
Securing the vehicle against
rolling away ................................... 320
MP3
Operation ....................................... 192
see separate operating instructions
Multifunction display
Function/notes ............................. 188
Permanent display ......................... 197
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer . 187
Overview .......................................... 31
12 Index
N
Navigation
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 191
see separate operating instructions
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 134
O
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 50
Important safety notes .................... 38
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
Assistance menu ........................... 194
Audio menu ................................... 192
Convenience submenu .................. 199
Displaying a service message ........ 270
Display messages .......................... 200
Factory settings submenu ............. 199
Important safety notes .................. 186
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 196
Lighting submenu .......................... 197
Menu overview .............................. 189
Message memory .......................... 200
Navigation menu ............................ 191
Operation ....................................... 187
Service menu ................................. 196
Settings menu ............................... 196
Standard display ............................ 189
Telephone menu ............................ 193
Trip menu ...................................... 189
Vehicle submenu ........................... 198
Video DVD operation ..................... 193
Opening and closing the side trim
panels ................................................. 109
Operating system
see On-board computer
Outside temperature display ........... 187
Overhead control panel ...................... 34
Override feature
Rear side windows ........................... 58
P
Paint code number ............................ 328
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 273
Panic alarm .......................................... 38
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel
Opening/closing the roller
sunblind ........................................... 82
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 82
Resetting ......................................... 82
Panorama sliding sunroof
Important safety notes .................... 80
Parcel net ........................................... 239
Parking ............................................... 149
Important safety notes .................. 149
Parking brake ................................ 150
Position of exterior mirror, front-
passenger side ................................. 94
Rear view camera .......................... 176
see Active Parking Assist
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
Active Parking Assist ..................... 172
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
Parking brake
Display message ............................ 203
Electric parking brake .................... 150
Warning lamp ................................. 230
Parking lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 100
Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 108
PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 171
Driving system ............................... 169
Function/notes ............................. 169
Important safety notes .................. 169
Problem (malfunction) ................... 172
Range of the sensors ..................... 169
Warning display ............................. 170
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp ...................................................... 53
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 276
Power washers .................................. 272
Power windows
see Side windows
Program selector button .................. 143
Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 20
Pulling away
Automatic transmission ................. 136
Index 13
Q
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 24
R
Radar sensor system
Activating/deactivating ................. 199
Display message ............................ 215
Radio
Selecting a station ......................... 192
see separate operating instructions
Reading lamp ..................................... 103
Rear compartment
Setting the air vents ...................... 131
Rear fog lamp
Changing bulbs .............................. 109
Display message ............................ 210
Switching on/off ........................... 100
Rear lamps
Changing bulbs .............................. 109
see Lights
Rear seat
Adjusting the angle of the
backrests ....................................... 242
Folding the backrest forwards/
back (vehicles without the EASY-
VARIO-PLUS system) ..................... 240
Folding the backrest forwards/
back (vehicles with the EASY-
VARIO-PLUS system) ..................... 241
Fore-and-aft adjustment ................ 243
Rear view camera
Cleaning instructions ..................... 275
Function/notes ............................. 176
Switching on/off ........................... 177
Rear-view mirror
Anti-glare (manual) .......................... 92
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 93
Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) ................... 129
Switching on/off ........................... 128
Rear window wiper
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 113
Switching on/off ........................... 112
Refrigerant (air-conditioning
system)
Important safety notes .................. 334
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 29
Important safety notes .................. 147
Refueling process .......................... 148
see Fuel
Remote control
Garage door opener ....................... 260
Programming (garage door opener) 260
Reporting safety defects .................... 25
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 214
Warning lamp ................................. 231
see Fuel
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 129
Restraint system
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System)
Reversing feature
Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 80
Roller sunblinds ............................... 81
Side windows ................................... 77
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 22
Roller sunblind
Opening/closing .............................. 82
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ..................................... 81
Roof carrier ........................................ 247
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 277
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 335
Route (navigation)
see Route guidance (navigation)
Route guidance (navigation) ............ 191
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 50
Child restraint systems .................... 50
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
Seat
Folding the backrest (rear
compartment) forwards/back
14 Index
(vehicles without the EASY-
VARIO-PLUS system) ..................... 240
Folding the backrest (rear
compartment) forwards/back
(vehicles with the EASY-VARIO-
PLUS system) ................................ 241
Seat belts
Adjusting the height ......................... 48
Belt force limiters ............................ 49
center rear-compartment seat ......... 48
Cleaning ......................................... 277
Correct usage .................................. 46
Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 49
Fastening ......................................... 47
Important safety guidelines ............. 45
Releasing ......................................... 48
Safety guidelines ............................. 40
Warning lamp ................................. 224
Warning lamp (function) ................... 49
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 88
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 88
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar
support ............................................ 90
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 89
Cleaning the cover ......................... 276
Correct driver's seat position ........... 86
Important safety notes .................... 87
Seat heating problem ...................... 91
Storing settings (memory function) .. 95
Switching seat heating on/off ......... 91
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 275
Service menu (on-board computer) . 196
Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 332
Coolant (engine) ............................ 333
Engine oil ....................................... 332
Fuel ................................................ 330
Important safety notes .................. 329
Refrigerant (air-conditioning
system) .......................................... 334
Washer fluid ................................... 334
Service work
see ASSYST PLUS
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 199
On-board computer ....................... 196
Setting the air distribution ............... 126
Setting the airflow ............................ 126
Side impact air bag ............................. 44
Side marker lamp (display
message) ............................................ 211
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 274
Convenience closing feature ............ 78
Convenience opening feature .......... 78
Important safety information ........... 77
Opening/closing .............................. 77
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 79
Resetting ......................................... 79
Sliding sunroof
see Panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 70
Changing the programming ............. 69
Checking the battery ....................... 70
Convenience closing feature ............ 78
Convenience opening feature .......... 78
Display message ............................ 223
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 68
Important safety notes .................... 68
Loss ................................................. 72
Mechanical key ................................ 69
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 135
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 72
Starting the engine ........................ 135
SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 135
Snow chains ...................................... 301
Sockets
Center console .............................. 251
Luggage compartment ................... 251
Points to observe before use ......... 250
Rear compartment ......................... 251
Specialist workshop ............................ 24
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Activating/deactivating the
additional speedometer ................. 196
Digital ............................................ 190
In the Instrument cluster ................. 29
Segments ...................................... 187
Selecting the unit of measurement 196
see Instrument cluster
Index 15
SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System)
Display message ............................ 207
Introduction ..................................... 38
Warning lamp ................................. 230
Warning lamp (function) ................... 39
Standing lamps
Changing bulbs .............................. 108
Display message ............................ 210
Switching on/off ........................... 100
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 135
STEER CONTROL .................................. 64
Steering (display message) .............. 222
Steering wheel
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 91
Button overview ............................... 31
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 187
Cleaning ......................................... 276
Important safety notes .................... 91
Paddle shifters ............................... 144
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 144
Stowage areas ................................... 237
Stowage compartments
Armrest (front) ............................... 238
Armrest (under) ............................. 238
Center console .............................. 237
Cup holders ................................... 247
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 237
Glove box ....................................... 237
Important safety information ......... 237
Parcel net ...................................... 239
Under driver's seat/front-
passenger seat .............................. 238
Stowage space
Center console (rear) ..................... 238
Summer tires ..................................... 300
Sun visor ............................................ 249
Supplemental Restraint System
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System)
Surround lighting (on-board
computer) .......................................... 198
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ................................................. 129
Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 65
T
Tachometer ........................................ 187
Tailgate
Display message ............................ 222
Emergency unlocking ....................... 76
Important safety notes .................... 75
Opening/closing (from outside) ....... 76
Opening dimensions ...................... 335
Tail lamps
Display message ............................ 210
see Lights
Tank content
Fuel gauge ....................................... 29
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 329
Emergency spare wheel ................. 326
Information .................................... 328
Tires/wheels ................................. 323
Vehicle data ................................... 335
TELEAID
Call priority .................................... 255
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 256
Downloading routes ....................... 259
Emergency call .............................. 253
Geo fencing ................................... 259
Important safety notes .................. 251
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 258
MB info call button ........................ 255
Remote vehicle locking .................. 257
Roadside Assistance button .......... 254
Search & Send ............................... 256
Self-test ......................................... 252
Speed alert .................................... 259
System .......................................... 252
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 260
Vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis ....................................... 258
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 257
Telephone
Accepting a call ............................. 193
Display message ............................ 222
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 193
Number from the phone book ........ 194
Redialing ........................................ 194
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 194
16 Index
Temperature
Coolant .......................................... 186
Outside temperature ...................... 187
Setting (climate control) ................ 125
Theft deterrent systems
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 65
Immobilizer ...................................... 64
Through-loading ................................ 239
Time
see separate operating instructions
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 282
Tire pressure
Checking manually ........................ 305
Display message ............................ 219
Maximum ....................................... 304
Notes ............................................. 303
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 284
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 284
Recommended ............................... 301
Tire pressure loss warning
system
Important safety notes .................. 305
Restarting ...................................... 305
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 318
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 316
Bar (definition) ............................... 316
Changing a wheel .......................... 319
Characteristics .............................. 316
Checking ........................................ 299
Definition of terms ......................... 316
Direction of rotation ...................... 319
Display message ............................ 219
Distribution of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 318
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ............................................... 315
DOT (Department of
Transportation) (definition) ............ 316
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(definition) ..................................... 317
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
(definition) ..................................... 317
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) (definition) ......................... 317
Important safety notes .................. 298
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment (definition) ...... 316
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 317
Labeling (overview) ........................ 312
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 318
Load index ..................................... 315
Load index (definition) ................... 317
M+S tires ....................................... 300
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(definition) ..................................... 317
Maximum load on a tire (definition) 317
Maximum permissible tire
pressure (definition) ....................... 317
Maximum tire load ......................... 310
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 317
MOExtended tires .......................... 300
Optional equipment weight
(definition) ..................................... 318
PSI (pounds per square inch)
(definition) ..................................... 317
Replacing ....................................... 319
Service life ..................................... 300
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 318
Speed rating (definition) ................ 317
Storing ........................................... 319
Structure and characteristics
(definition) ..................................... 316
Summer tires ......................... 157, 300
Temperature .................................. 312
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) ..................................... 318
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 318
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 318
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 316
Tire size (data) ............................... 323
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity, speed rating .................... 313
Tire tread ....................................... 299
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 318
Total load limit (definition) ............. 318
Traction ......................................... 311
Traction (definition) ....................... 318
Tread wear ..................................... 311
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ...................................... 311
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (definition) .................... 316
Unladen weight (definition) ............ 317
Index 17
Wear indicator (definition) ............. 318
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 316
see Flat tire
Top Tether ............................................ 55
Towing
Important safety guidelines ........... 291
Installing the towing eye ................ 292
Removing the towing eye ............... 292
Towing away
With both axles on the ground ....... 293
With front axle raised ..................... 293
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 294
Important safety notes .................. 291
Installing the towing eye ................ 292
Removing the towing eye ............... 292
Traction control ................................... 62
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position display ......... 141
Transporting the vehicle .................. 293
Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 276
Trip computer (on-board computer) 189
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 189
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 190
Trunk
see Tailgate
Turn signals
Changing bulbs (front) ................... 108
Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 109
Display message ............................ 209
Switching on/off ........................... 100
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 75
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) ............................. 74
V
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 249
Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 24
Data acquisition ............................... 25
Equipment ....................................... 21
Individual settings .......................... 196
Limited Warranty ............................. 25
Loading .......................................... 306
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 75
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 68
Lowering ........................................ 322
Maintenance .................................... 22
Parking for a long period ................ 152
Pulling away ................................... 136
Raising ........................................... 320
Reporting problems ......................... 24
Securing from rolling away ............ 320
Towing away .................................. 291
Tow-starting ................................... 291
Transporting .................................. 293
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 75
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 68
Vehicle data ................................... 335
Vehicle data ....................................... 335
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 335
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 75
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 328
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 280
Video (DVD) ........................................ 193
VIN ...................................................... 328
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 225
Brakes ........................................... 225
Check Engine ................................. 231
Coolant .......................................... 231
Distance warning ........................... 233
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 233
ESP® .............................................. 227
ESP® OFF ....................................... 228
Fuel tank ........................................ 231
Overview .......................................... 30
18 Index
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 53
Reserve fuel ................................... 231
Seat belt ........................................ 224
SRS ................................................ 230
Warranty ............................................ 328
Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 223
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 322
Wheel chock ...................................... 320
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 319
Checking ........................................ 299
Cleaning ......................................... 273
Cleaning (warning) ......................... 319
Emergency spare wheel ................. 325
Important safety notes .................. 298
Interchanging/changing ................ 319
Mounting a new wheel ................... 322
Mounting a wheel .......................... 319
Removing a wheel .......................... 322
Storing ........................................... 319
Tightening torque ........................... 322
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 323
Window curtain air bag
Display message ............................ 208
Operation ......................................... 45
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 127
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 269
Notes ............................................. 334
Windshield wipers
Display message ............................ 223
Problem (malfunction) ................... 115
Rear window wiper ........................ 112
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 112
Switching on/off ........................... 111
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 157
Snow chains .................................. 301
Winter operation
General notes ................................ 300
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 300
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 274
Important safety notes .................. 112
Replacing (rear window) ................ 113
Replacing (windshield) ................... 113
Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 276
Workshops
see Qualified specialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 126
Index 19
Protection of the environment
General notes
HEnvironmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of
comprehensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
Roperating conditions of your vehicle
Ryour personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel
consumption.
Ralways make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need
them.
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
Ralways have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
starting the engine.
Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary.
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front.
Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel
consumption.
Environmental concerns and
recommendations
Wherever the operating instructions require
you to dispose of materials, first try to
regenerate or re-use them. Observe the
relevant environmental rules and regulations
when disposing of materials. In this way you
will help to protect the environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
HEnvironmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
parts.
! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning
Devices, as well as control units and
sensors for these restraint systems, may be
installed in the following areas of your
vehicle:
Rdoors
Rdoor pillars
Rdoor sills
Rseats
Rcockpit
Rinstrument cluster
Rcenter console
Do not install accessories such as audio
systems in these areas. Do not carry out
repairs or welding. You could impair the
operating efficiency of the restraint
systems.
20 Introduction
Have aftermarket accessories installed at
a qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels
as well as accessories relevant to safety
which have not been approved by Mercedes.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-
relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use
only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of
equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and
accessories that have been specifically
approved for your vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been
specifically developed, manufactured or
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz
vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should therefore be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts for necessary service and repair work.
In addition, strategically located parts
delivery centers provide quick and reliable
parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification
number (VIN) (Y page 328) and the engine
number (Y page 329) when ordering genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts.
Operator's Manual
General notes
Before you first drive off, read this Operator's
Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with
your vehicle.
For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,
follow the instructions and warning notices in
this manual. Disregarding them may lead to
damage to the vehicle or personal injury.
Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard
of the instructions is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Vehicle equipment
This Operator's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of going to
print. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features described.
This also applies to safety-related systems
and functions. The equipment in your vehicle
may therefore differ from some of the
descriptions or illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all
systems installed in your vehicle.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
if you have any questions about equipment or
operation.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and should
be kept in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Service and literature
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
REmission Systems Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Control Systems Warranty
RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon
laws)
Introduction 21
Z
Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
all the necessary maintenance work which
should be done at regular intervals.
Always have the Service and Warranty
Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle
to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
service advisor will record every service for
you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program offers technical help in the event of
a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
Assistance Hotline are answered by our
agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside
Assistance" section in the Service and
Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both
in your vehicle literature portfolio.
Change of address or change of
ownership
In the event of a change of address, please
send us the "Notification of Address Change"
in the Service and Guarantee booklet or
simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline
number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
contacting you in a timely manner should the
need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send
us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in
the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply
call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that:
Rservice facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic
converter.
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause
engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available
for delivery in Europe through our European
Delivery Program. For details, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to
one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
22 Introduction
Operating safety
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/
maintenance work as well as any required
repairs carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
GWARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
GWARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other
networked components. In particular,
systems relevant to safety could also be
affected. As a result, these may no longer
function as intended and/or jeopardize the
operating safety of the vehicle. There is an
increased risk of an accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as
electronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road
Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb or a hole in the road
Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage or
parts of the chassis.
In situations like this, the body, the
undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires
could be damaged without the damage being
visible. Components damaged in this way can
unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an
accident, no longer withstand the strain they
are designed to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged,
combustible materials such as leaves, grass
or twigs can gather between the underbody
and the underbody paneling. If these
materials come in contact with hot parts of
the exhaust system for an extended period,
they can catch fire.
Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop. If on continuing your journey you
notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over
and stop the vehicle immediately, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. In
such cases, visit a qualified specialist
workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: 1) These devices may not cause
harmful interference, and 2) These devices
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) These devices
may not cause interference, and (2) These
devices must accept any interference,
Introduction 23
Z
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device."
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended
for the connection of diagnostic equipment at
a qualified specialist workshop.
GWARNING
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
the operating safety of the vehicle could be
affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not connect any equipment to a
diagnostics connection in the vehicle.
GWARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats.
! If the engine is switched off and
equipment on the diagnostics connection
is used, the starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics
connection can lead to emissions monitoring
information being reset, for example. This
may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the
requirements of the next emissions test
during the main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a
qualified specialist workshop. It has the
necessary specialist knowledge, tools and
qualifications to correctly carry out the work
required on your vehicle. This is especially the
case for work relevant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Always have the following work carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
Rwork relevant to safety
Rservice and maintenance work
Rrepair work
Ralterations, installation work and
modifications
Rwork on electronic components
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or
others could fail to recognize certain dangers.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when
driving your vehicle:
Rthe safety notes in this manual
Rthe Technical Data section in this manual
Rtraffic rules and regulations
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
motor vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or
contact us at one of the following addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
24 Introduction
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
! Follow the instructions in this manual
about the proper operation of your vehicle
as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Damage to your vehicle that arises from
culpable contraventions against these
instructions is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the
New or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
Data stored in the vehicle
Information about electronic data
acquisition in the vehicle
(Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
Your vehicle records electronic data. If your
vehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada:
TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event of
an accident.
This information helps, for example, to test
vehicle systems after an accident and to
continually improve vehicle safety.
Daimler AG can access this data and submit
it:
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner
Ron the instruction of prosecuting
authorities
Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that
involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its sales
and service organizations
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE
AID) purchase agreement to find out more
about data that can be recorded and
transmitted by this system.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-
source software used in your vehicle and its
electronic components is available on the
following website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource
Introduction 25
Z
26
Dashboard ........................................... 28
Instrument cluster .............................. 29
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 31
Center console .................................... 32
Overhead control panel ...................... 34
Door control panel .............................. 35
27
At a glance
Dashboard
Function Page
:Steering wheel paddle
shifters 144
;Combination switch 100
=Instrument cluster 29
?Horn
ADIRECT SELECT lever 140
BPARKTRONIC warning
display 169
COverhead control panel 34
DClimate control systems 118
Function Page
EIgnition lock 135
FAdjusting the steering
wheel 91
GCruise control lever 158
HElectric parking brake 150
ILight switch 98
JDiagnostics connection 24
KOpening the hood 266
28 Dashboard
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
Function Page
:Speedometer with
segments 187
;Multifunction display 188
=Tachometer 187
Function Page
?Coolant temperature 186
AFuel gauge
BInstrument cluster lighting 186
Instrument cluster 29
At a glance
Warning and indicator lamps
Function Page
:L Low-beam
headlamps 99
;T Parking lamps 100
=K High-beam
headlamps 100
?÷ ESP®227
A! Electric parking brake
(red) 230
B! Electric parking brake
(yellow) 230
C· Distance warning 233
D#! Turn signals 100
Function Page
E6 SRS 230
Fü Seat belt 224
G? Coolant 231
HR Rear fog lamp 100
IN Front fog lamps 99
J; Check Engine 231
Kæ Reserve fuel 231
Lå ESP® OFF 227
M! ABS 225
NJ Brakes 225
30 Instrument cluster
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function Page
:Multifunction display 188
;Audio/COMAND display;
see the separate operating
instructions
=?
Switches on the Voice
Control System; see the
separate operating
instructions
?~
Rejects or ends a call 193
Exits phone book/redial
memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial
memory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
Function Page
A=;
Selects a menu 187
9:
Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists 187
a
Confirms your selection 187
Hides display messages 200
B%
Back 187
Switches off the Voice
Control System; see the
separate operating
instructions
Multifunction steering wheel 31
At a glance
Center console
Center console, upper section
Function Page
:Audio system/COMAND;
see the separate operating
instructions
;c Seat heating 91
=c PARKTRONIC 169
?¤ ECO start/stop
function 136
Function Page
A£ Hazard warning
lamps 101
B4 PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF indicator lamp 53
CÚ Selects the drive
program 143
32 Center console
At a glance
Center console, lower section
Function Page
DAshtray 249
Cigarette lighter 250
Socket 250
Stowage compartment 237
EStowage compartment 237
Function Page
FCup holder 247
GStowage compartment 237
HAudio/COMAND
controller; see the separate
operating instructions
Center console 33
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Function Page
:u Switches the rear
compartment interior
lighting on/off 104
;p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off 103
=| Switches the front
interior lighting/automatic
interior lighting control off 104
?ï MB Info call button
(mbrace system) 255
ARear-view mirror 92
BButtons for the garage door
opener 262
CG SOS button (mbrace
system) 253
Function Page
DF Roadside Assistance
call button (mbrace
system) 254
EEyeglasses compartment 237
F3 Opens/closes the
panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel with roller
sunblinds 81
Gc Switches the front
interior lighting on 104
Hp Switches the left-
hand reading lamp on/off 103
34 Overhead control panel
At a glance
Door control panel
Function Page
:Opens the door 73
;%& Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 74
=r45= Saves
the seat and exterior mirror
settings 95
?Adjusts the seats
electrically 88
A7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the
exterior mirrors in/out
electrically 92
Function Page
BW Opens/closes the
side windows 77
Cn Activates/
deactivates the override
feature for the side
windows in the rear
compartment 58
Door control panel 35
At a glance
36
Useful information .............................. 38
Panic alarm .......................................... 38
Occupant safety .................................. 38
Children in the vehicle ........................ 50
Driving safety systems ....................... 58
Theft deterrent locking system ......... 64
37
Safety
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
Panic alarm
X To activate: press ! button : for at
least one second.
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting
flashes.
XTo deactivate: press ! button :
again.
or
XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Occupant safety
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Modifications to or work improperly
conducted on restraint system components
or their wiring, as well as tampering with
interconnected electronic systems, can lead
to the restraint systems no longer functioning
as intended.
Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy
inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
although the deceleration threshold for air
bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
never modify the restraint systems. Do not
tamper with electronic components or their
software.
In this section, you will learn the most
important facts about the restraint system
components of the vehicle.
The restraint system consists of:
RSeat belts
RChild restraint systems
RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing
system
Additional protection is provided by:
RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
RAir bag system components with the
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp
The different air bag systems work
independently of each other. The protective
functions of the system work in conjunction
with each other. Not all air bags are always
deployed in an accident.
iFor information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle restraint
systems for infants and children, see
"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 50).
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
Introduction
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with:
RThe 6 SRS warning lamp
RAir bags
RAir bag control unit (with crash sensors)
38 Occupant safety
Safety
REmergency Tensioning Device for the front
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the
rear
RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat
belts and the outer seat belts in the rear
SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming
into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior
in the event of an accident. It can also reduce
the effect of the forces to which occupants
are subjected during an accident.
SRS warning lamp
GWARNING
The SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction if the 6 SRS indicator lamp:
Rdoes not light up at all
Rdoes not go out after approximately four
seconds after the engine is started
Rlights up after the engine is started or while
the vehicle is in motion
For your safety, Mercedes-Benz strongly
recommends that you have the system
checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop. SRS may otherwise fail
to activate when it is needed in the event of
an accident, which could lead to serious or
fatal injuries. SRS might also be activated
unexpectedly and unnecessarily, which could
also result in injury.
In addition, work carried out improperly on
SRS may render SRS inoperative or cause
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the
SRS system should only be carried out by
qualified specialist personnel. Consult a
qualified specialist workshop.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for details. USA only: for further information,
contact our Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
after the engine is started.
SRS functions are checked regularly when the
ignition is switched on or the engine is
running. Therefore, malfunctions can be
detected in good time.
Triggering of Emergency Tensioning
Device and air bags
During the first stage of a collision, the air bag
control unit evaluates important physical
data relating to vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, such as:
Rduration
Rdirection
Rmagnitude
Based on the evaluation of this data, the air
bag control unit pre-emptively triggers the
Emergency Tensioning Device in the first
stage.
If there is an even higher rate of vehicle
deceleration or acceleration in a longitudinal
direction, the front air bags are also deployed.
Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air
bags. The air bag control unit evaluates
vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the
event of a collision. In the first deployment
stage, the front air bag is filled with enough
propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.
The front air bag is fully deployed if a second
deployment threshold is reached within a few
milliseconds.
The Emergency Tensioning Device and air bag
triggering thresholds are variable and are
adapted to the detected rate of deceleration
or acceleration of the vehicle. This process is
pre-emptive in nature. The triggering process
must take place in good time at the start of
the collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or
acceleration and the direction of the force are
essentially determined by:
Rthe distribution of forces during the
collision
Rthe collision angle
Occupant safety 39
Safety
Z
Rthe deformation characteristics of the
vehicle
Rthe characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided
Factors that can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a
decisive role in the deployment of an air bag,
nor do they provide an indication of air bag
deployment.
The vehicle may be deformed significantly,
e.g. the hood or the fender, without an air bag
being deployed. This is the case if only parts
which are relatively easily deformed are
affected and the rate of deceleration is not
high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed
even though the vehicle suffers only minor
deformation. This is the case if, for example,
very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal
body members are hit, and sufficient
deceleration occurs as a result.
iThe front Emergency Tensioning Devices
can only be triggered if the seat belt
tongues on the front seats are correctly
engaged in the seat belt buckles.
iNot all air bags are deployed in an
accident. The different air bag systems
work independently of each other.
How the air bag system works is
determined by predicting the severity of
the accident, especially vehicle
deceleration or acceleration, and the type
of accident:
Rhead-on collision
Rside impact
Rrollover
Safety guidelines for seat belts,
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
and air bags
GWARNING
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have
been subjected to stress in an accident
must be replaced. Their anchoring points
must also be checked. Only use seat belts
installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain
perchlorate material, which may require
special handling and regard for the
environment. Check your national disposal
guidelines. In California, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
that has deployed must be replaced.
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
RDo not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts, as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
RDo not make any modifications to the SRS
wiring or components.
RDo not modify or remove any components
or parts of the SRS.
RDo not install additional trim material, seat
covers, badges, etc. to the:
-padded steering wheel boss
-knee bag covers
-front-passenger air bag cover
-outer side of front seat bolsters
-outer seat bolsters of the rear bench seat
backrest
-roof frame trim
RDo not install additional electrical/
electronic equipment on or near SRS
components and wiring.
RKeep the area between the air bags and
occupants free of objects (e.g. packages,
handbags, umbrellas etc.).
RDo not hang any objects such as coat
hangers on the coat hooks or the grab
handle above the door. These items may be
thrown around in the vehicle and cause
40 Occupant safety
Safety
head and other injuries when the window
curtain air bag is deployed.
RAir bag system components will be hot after
an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
RNever rest your feet on the dashboard or
the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor
in front of the seat.
RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended air bag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be
performed by qualified technicians.
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
RFor your protection and the protection of
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
ETD, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
required inflation volume, and the material
of the air bags, there is the possibility of
abrasions or other, potentially more serious
injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz
strongly recommends that you inform the
subsequent owner that the vehicle is
equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the
applicable section in the Operator's Manual.
Air bags
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence
of injuries and fatalities in certain situations:
Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-
passenger front air bags and driver's knee
bag)
Rside impacts (side impact air bags and
window curtain air bags)
Rrollover (window curtain air bags)
However, no system available today can
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
When the air bags are deployed, a small
amount of powder is released. The powder
generally does not constitute a health hazard
and does not indicate that there is a fire in the
vehicle. In order to prevent potential
breathing difficulties, you should leave the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have any breathing difficulty but cannot get
out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,
then get fresh air by opening a window or
door.
GWARNING
In order to reduce the potential danger of
injuries caused during the deployment of the
front air bags, the driver and front passenger
must always be correctly seated and wear
their seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision, you must always be in the normal
seat position with your back against the
backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure
that it is correctly positioned on your body.
As the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating position
and correct positioning of the hands on the
steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
properly or are too close to the air bag can be
seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it
inflates with great force instantaneously:
Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and
in a position that is as upright as possible
with your back against the backrest.
Rmove the driver's seat as far back as
possible, still permitting proper operation
of vehicle controls. The distance from the
center of the driver's chest to the center of
the air bag cover on the steering wheel
must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You
should be able to accomplish this by
adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
Occupant safety 41
Safety
Z
you have any difficulties, please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the
steering wheel or dashboard.
Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.
Placing hands and arms inside the rim can
increase the risk and potential severity of
hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag
inflates.
Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back
as possible from the dashboard when the
seat is occupied.
Roccupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their heads
in the area of the door where the side
impact air bag inflates. This could result in
serious or fatal injuries should the side
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as
upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized
infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight
of the child.
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you
make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator's Manual.
GWARNING
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children in an automobile is in a rear seat.
A side impact air bag related injury may occur
if occupants, especially children, are not
properly seated or restrained when next to a
side impact air bag which needs to deploy
rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Always sit as upright as possible
and use the seat belts properly.
Make sure that children 12 years
old and under use an appropriately
sized child restraint, infant
restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
(2) Always wear seat belts properly.
If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a
bang, and a small amount of powder may also
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
affect your hearing. The powder that is
released generally does not constitute a
health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp
lights up.
The air bags are deployed if the air bag control
unit detects the need for deployment. Only in
the event of such a situation will the air bags
provide their supplemental protection.
If the driver and front passenger do not wear
their seat belts, it is not possible for the air
bags to provide their supplemental
protection.
In the event of other types of impacts and
impacts below air bag deployment
thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The
driver and passenger will then be protected
to the extent possible by a properly fastened
seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
needed to provide the best possible
protection in a rollover.
Air bags provide additional protection; they
are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.
All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat
belts regardless of whether your vehicle is
equipped with air bags or not.
It is important for your safety and that of your
passengers to have deployed air bags
replaced and to have any malfunctioning air
bags repaired. This will help to make sure the
air bags continue to perform their protective
function for the vehicle occupants in the
event of a crash.
Front air bags
! Make sure that there are no objects
exerting force on the front-passenger seat.
This could cause the system to identify the
seat as being occupied, and in the event of
42 Occupant safety
Safety
an accident, the restraint systems on the
front-passenger side might be triggered.
Have triggered restraint systems replaced.
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
steering wheel; front-passenger front air
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
box.
The front air bags increase protection for the
driver's and front-passenger's head and
chest.
They are deployed:
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a
longitudinal direction
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
Rif the system determines that air bag
deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt
Rdepending on whether the seat belt is being
used
Rindependently of other air bags in the
vehicle
If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags are
generally not deployed.
Front-passenger air bag ; is only activated
if the system determines that the front-
passenger seat is occupied. The 4
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on
the center console does not light up
(Y page 53).
If a child restraint system is installed on the
front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF 4 indicator lamp on the
center console is not on:
Ra child restraint system without a
transponder for the air bag deactivation
system is installed or
Ra child restraint system with a transponder
has not been installed properly.
Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air
bags. The air bag control unit evaluates
vehicle deceleration or acceleration in the
event of a collision. In the first deployment
stage, the front air bag is filled with part of the
total available propellant gas, thereby
reducing the risk of injury. If the air bag
control unit recognizes within a few
milliseconds that the vehicle is being braked
or accelerated faster than originally
predicted, the front air bag is filled with the
maximum amount of propellant gas available.
The lighter the passenger-side occupant, the
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
(predicted at the start of the impact) for
second stage inflation of the front-passenger
front air bag. In the second stage, the front
air bags are inflated with the maximum
amount of propellant gas available.
The front air bags are not deployed in
situations where a low impact severity is
predicted. You will then be protected by the
fastened seat belt.
The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
Rthe 45 indicator lamp on the center
console is not lit (Y page 53)
Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high
impact severity
Occupant safety 43
Safety
Z
Driver's knee bag
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the
steering column. The driver's knee bag is
always deployed along with the driver's front
air bag. The driver's knee bag is designed to
operate together with the front air bags in
frontal impacts if certain thresholds are
exceeded. The driver's knee bag operates
best in conjunction with correctly positioned
and fastened seat belts.
Driver's knee bag : increases the driver's
protection against:
Rknee injuries
Rthigh injuries
Rlower leg injuries
Side impact air bags
GWARNING
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
the side impact air bags. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
availability.
GWARNING
The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
control are located in the doors. Do not
modify any components of the doors or door
trim panels including, for example, the
addition of door speakers.
Improper repair work on the doors or the
modification or addition of components to the
doors create a risk of rendering the side
impact air bags inoperative or causing
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the
doors must therefore only be performed by
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer
seat cushions.
When deployed, the side impact air bags offer
additional protection of the thorax for
occupants on the front seats as well as also
of the pelvis for the vehicle occupants on the
side of the vehicle on which the impact
occurs. However, they do not protect the:
Rhead
Rneck
Rarms
The side impact air bags are deployed:
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
Rindependently of the front air bags
Rindependently of the ETDs
If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air
bags are generally not deployed. Side impact
air bags are deployed if the system detects
high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a
lateral direction and determines that side
impact air bag deployment can offer
44 Occupant safety
Safety
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt.
Side impact air bags will not deploy in side
impacts which do not exceed the system's
preset deployment thresholds for lateral
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be
protected by the fastened seat belt.
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side is not deployed in the
following situations:
ROCS has detected that the front-passenger
seat is unoccupied.
Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not
fastened.
The side impact air bag on the front-
passenger side will deploy if the front-
passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of
whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
Window curtain air bags
Window curtain air bags : enhance the level
of protection for the head, but not chest or
arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of
the vehicle on which the impact occurs.
Window curtain air bags : are integrated
into the side of the roof frame and deployed
in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
Window curtain air bags are deployed:
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Ron the driver's side and passenger side, in
the event of a vehicle rollover and if the
system determines that air bag deployment
can offer the vehicle occupants additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt
Rindependently of the use of the seat belt
Rregardless of whether the front-passenger
seat is occupied
Rindependently of the front air bags
Window curtain air bags : will not deploy in
the event of impacts which do not exceed the
system's preset deployment thresholds for
vehicle acceleration/deceleration. You will
then be protected by the fastened seat belt.
Seat belts
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.
Always make sure all of your passengers are
properly restrained. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can
be considerably more severe without your
seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat
belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit
the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. The air bags can only protect
as intended if the occupants are properly
wearing their seat belts.
GWARNING
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
Occupant safety 45
Safety
Z
it, the seat belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a position that is as upright as
possible and the seat belt is properly
positioned on the body.
GWARNING
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than
there are seat belts available. Make sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at a
time.
GWARNING
Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts
that have been subjected to a load in an
accident replaced and the anchorages
checked.
Only use seat belts that have been approved
by Mercedes-Benz.
Never tamper with seat belts. This can result
in the unintended deployment of the
Emergency Tensioning Devices or the failure
to deploy when necessary.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts, as this may
severely weaken them. In the event of a
collision, they may be unable to provide
adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in:
Rall 50 states
Rthe U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all
vehicle occupants should correctly fasten
their seat belts before starting the journey.
iSee "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 50) for further information on
infants and children traveling in the vehicle
as well as on child restraint systems.
Proper use of the seat belts
GWARNING
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
RSeat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other
way than as described in this section, as
that could result in serious injuries in the
event of an accident.
REach occupant should wear their seat belt
at all times, because seat belts help reduce
the likelihood of and potential severity of
injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
The integrated restraint system includes
SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee
bag, front-passenger front air bag, side
impact air bags, window curtain air bags for
the side windows), Emergency Tensioning
Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front
seat knee bolsters.
The system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted
occupants in certain frontal (front air bags,
driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side
(side impact air bags, window curtain air
bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed
preset deployment thresholds and in
certain rollovers (window curtain air bags
and ETDs).
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.
In a frontal crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
belt would also apply too much force to the
ribs or abdomen, which could severely
injure internal organs such as your liver or
spleen.
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder. It should not
46 Occupant safety
Safety
touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder
portion of the seat belt under your arm. For
this purpose, you can adjust the height of
the seat belt outlet.
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on
your hips and not across the abdomen. If
the lap belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
a crash.
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
these might cause injuries.
RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
snugly. Take special care of this when
wearing loose clothing.
RNever use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
around a person and another person or
other objects at the same time.
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of
the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
The twisted seat belt against your body
could cause injuries.
RPregnant women should also always use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible on
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
the abdomen.
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
as upright as possible.
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
sure it is properly positioned.
RNever place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
booster seats, always follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.
GWARNING
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the seat belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to seat
belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
the seat belts.
Fastening seat belts
GWARNING
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained on the rear
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be
placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriately sized
child restraint system or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. For additional information, see the
"Children in the vehicle" section.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Occupant safety 47
Safety
Z
XAdjust the seat and move the backrest to
an almost vertical position (Y page 86).
XPull the seat belt smoothly through belt
sash guide :.
XWithout twisting it, guide the shoulder
section of the seat belt across the middle
of your shoulder and the lap section across
your pelvis.
XEngage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
XIf necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
appropriate height (Y page 48).
XIf necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
across your body.
Information on releasing the seat belt with
release button ?(Y page 48).
Belt height adjustment
You can adjust the seat belt height on the
front seats. Adjust the belt to a height that
allows the upper part of the seat belt to be
routed across the center of your shoulder.
XTo raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
The belt sash guide engages in various
positions.
XTo lower: press and hold belt sash guide
release :.
XSlide the belt sash guide downwards.
XRelease belt sash guide release : and
make sure that the belt sash guide has
engaged.
Using the seat belt for the center rear-
compartment seat
If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded
down and back up again, the rear center seat
belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be
pulled out.
XTo release the rear center seat belt: pull
the seat belt out approximately 1 in
(25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrest
and then release it again.
The seat belt is retracted and released.
Releasing seat belts
! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
will be trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This could damage the door,
the door trim panel and the seat belt.
Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill
their protective function and must be
replaced. Visit a qualified specialist
workshop.
XPress release button ? on belt buckle =.
XGuide belt tongue ; back to belt sash
guide :.
48 Occupant safety
Safety
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
Regardless of whether the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts have already been
fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp
lights up for six seconds each time the engine
is started. It then goes out if the driver and
the front passenger have already fastened
their seat belts.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when
the engine is started, an additional warning
tone will sound. This warning tone stops after
a maximum of six seconds or once the
driver's seat belt is fastened.
If after six seconds the driver or front
passenger have not fastened their seat belts
and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp lights up:
Runtil the driver's or front passenger's seat
belt is fastened
Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is
exceeded, a warning tone also sounds with
increasing intensity for a maximum of
60 seconds or until the driver or front-
passenger seat belt has been fastened.
If the driver/front passenger unfasten their
seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the
7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a
warning tone sounds again.
The warning tone ceases even if the driver or
front-passenger seat belt has still not been
fastened after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt
warning lamp stops flashing but remains
illuminated.
After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the
warning tone is reactivated and the 7 seat
belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle
speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes
out if:
Rboth the driver and the front passenger
have fastened their seat belts.
or
Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.
iFor more information on the 7 seat
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
seat belts" (Y page 224).
Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat
belt force limiters
GWARNING
Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be
replaced.
For your safety, when disposing of the
pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
instructions. These are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! If the front-passenger seat is not
occupied, do not engage the seat belt
tongue in the buckle on the front-
passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency
Tensioning Device could be triggered in the
event of an accident.
The front seat belts and the outer seat belts
in the rear are equipped with Emergency
Tensioning Devices and seat belt force
limiters.
The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,
pulling them close against the body.
The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat
positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.
The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back
towards the backrest.
The ETDs can only be activated when:
Rthe ignition is switched on.
Rthe restraint systems are operational; see
"SRS warning lamp" 6(Y page 39).
Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
each of the front seat belts.
The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear
compartment are triggered independently of
the lock status of the seat belts.
The ETDs are triggered depending on the type
and severity of an accident:
Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end
collision, the vehicle decelerates or
Occupant safety 49
Safety
Z
accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal
direction during the initial stages of the
impact
Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side
opposite the impact the vehicle
decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a
lateral direction
Rif, in certain situations where the vehicle
rolls over, the system determines that it
can provide additional protection
If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,
and a small amount of powder may also be
released. Only in rare cases will the bang
affect your hearing. The powder that is
released generally does not constitute a
health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp
lights up.
If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat
belt force limiter and this is triggered, the
force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle
occupant is reduced.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats
are synchronized with the front air bags,
which take on a part of the deceleration force.
This results in the force exerted on the
occupant being distributed over a greater
area.
Children in the vehicle
Child restraint systems
Important safety notes
GWARNING
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight of
the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should always
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
properly and use an appropriately sized infant
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to deactivate the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate
child restraint on the front passenger seat.
RFor children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
front air bag may or may not be activated.
Always make sure the 4 5 indicator
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle. The only means to
completely eliminate this risk is to never
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat. We therefore strongly
recommend that you always place a child
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
RIf you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to do
so, make sure the 4 5 indicator
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front
50 Children in the vehicle
Safety
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Should the 4 5 indicator lamp not
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation.
Periodically check the 4 5 indicator
lamp while driving to make sure the 4
5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
4 5 indicator lamp goes out or
remains out, do not transport a child on the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
facing child restraint on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and weight
of the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle's seat belt according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
GWARNING
Infants and small children should never share
a seat belt with another occupant. In the event
of an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Children that are too large for a child restraint
must travel in seats using normal seat belts.
Position the shoulder belt across the chest
and shoulder, not the face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat
belt positioning for children over 41 lbs
(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/
shoulder belt fits properly without a booster
seat.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an
accident.
GWARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. The children
could:
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function
If children open a door, they could injure other
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
GWARNING
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment or trunk unless they
are firmly secured in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child's risk of injury in the event
of
Rstrong braking maneuvers
Rsudden changes of direction
Ran accident
Children in the vehicle 51
Safety
Z
Further information on secure stowage of
loads can be found under "Loading
guidelines".
If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:
RSecure the child with a child or infant seat
restraint system appropriate to the age and
weight of the child.
RMake sure that the infant or child is
properly secured at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always
properly secure all infants and children with
a child or infant seat restraint system for the
trip.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in:
Rall 50 states
Rthe U.S. territories
Rthe District of Columbia
Rall Canadian provinces
Infants and children must always be seated in
an appropriate infant or child restraint system
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. The infant or child restraint system
must be properly secured in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
All infant or child restraint systems must meet
the following standards:
RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225
RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system
corresponds to the standards can be found
on an instruction label on the child restraint
system. This confirmation can also be found
in the installation instructions that are
included with the child restraint system.
Always read and follow the manufacturer's
instructions when using an infant or child
restraint system or booster seat.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle
interior or on the infant or child restraint.
Child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat
GWARNING
If the front-passenger air bag is not disabled:
Ra child secured in a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat could be
seriously or even fatally injured by the front-
passenger air bag deploying. This is
especially a risk if the child is in the
immediate vicinity of the front-passenger
air bag when it deploys.
Rnever secure a child on the front-passenger
seat in a rearward-facing child restraint
system. Only secure a rearward-facing
child restraint system on a suitable rear
seat.
Ralways move the front-passenger seat to
the rearmost position if you secure a child
in a forward-facing child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat.
The front-passenger air bag is not disabled:
Ron vehicles without an air bag deactivation
system on the front-passenger seat.
Ron vehicles with an air bag deactivation
system on the front-passenger seat, unless
a child restraint system with transponders
for an air bag deactivation system is
installed on the front-passenger seat
Ron vehicles with an air bag deactivation
system on the front-passenger seat, if the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
4 is not lit.
To make you aware of this danger, a
corresponding warning sticker has been
affixed on the dashboard and on both sides of
the sun visor on the front-passenger side.
Information about recommended child
restraint systems is available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
52 Children in the vehicle
Safety
Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor
Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child
restraint system
Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat that is protected by an air
bag installed in front of it.
Air bag deactivation system on the
front-passenger seat
GWARNING
If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
indicator lamp does not light up when the
child restraint system is installed, the front-
passenger air bag has not been disabled. If
the front-passenger air bag deploys, the child
could be seriously or even fatally injured.
Proceed as follows:
Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat.
Rinstall a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a suitable rear seat.
or
Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front-passenger seat and
move the front-passenger seat to the
rearmost position.
Rhave the air bag deactivation system
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
To ensure that the air bag deactivation system
on the front-passenger seat functions/
communicates correctly, never place objects,
e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint
system. The entire base of the child restraint
system must always rest on the seat cushion.
An incorrectly installed child restraint system
cannot perform its intended protective
function in the event of an accident, and could
lead to injuries.
GWARNING
Do not place electronic devices on the front-
passenger seat, e.g.:
Rlaptops, when switched on
Rmobile phones
Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or
access cards
Signals from electronic equipment can cause
interference in the sensor system of the air
bag deactivation system. This can lead to a
system malfunction. This may cause the
4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp to light up even if no child seat with a
transponder for an air bag deactivation
system is installed. The front-passenger air
bag would not then deploy during an accident.
It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning
lamp lights up and/or the 4 PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up
briefly when you turn the key in the ignition
lock to position 2.
Children in the vehicle 53
Safety
Z
If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle
does not have an air bag deactivation system,
this is indicated by a special sticker. The
sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard
on the front-passenger side. The sticker is
visible when you open the front-passenger
door.
Vehicles without an air bag deactivation
system on the front-passenger seat: if you
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock, the 45 indicator lamp lights up
briefly but has no function. It does not
indicate that there is an air bag deactivation
system on the front-passenger seat.
The sensor system for the air bag deactivation
system detects whether a special Mercedes-
Benz child seat with a transponder for the air
bag deactivation system has been installed.
In this case, 45 indicator lamp :
lights up. The front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated:
iIf the front-passenger front air bag is
disabled by the air bag deactivation
system, the following remain enabled on
the front-passenger side:
Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Device
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors
in the rear
GWARNING
Children that are too large for a child restraint
must travel in seats using normal seat belts.
Position the shoulder belt across the chest
and shoulder, not the face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where
a normal shoulder/lap belt fit properly
without a booster.
Install the child seat according to
manufacturer's instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached to both
anchors.
An incorrectly installed child restraint system
could come loose during an accident and
seriously or even fatally injure the child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mountings must be replaced.
! When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child restraint system, make sure that the
seat belt for the center seat does not get
trapped. Otherwise, the seat belt could be
damaged.
54 Children in the vehicle
Safety
XInstall the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system. Comply with the
manufacturer's instructions when
installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized
securing system for specially designed child
restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing
rings : for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint systems are installed on the left and
right of the rear seats.
Secure child restraint systems without a
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing
system using the seat belts in the vehicle.
When installing child restraint systems, you
must observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Top Tether
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If the red display is visible when the rear seat
backrest is upright, it means the rear seat
backrest is not engaged correctly.
Always engage the rear seat backrests in an
upright position if there are passengers in the
rear compartment. Engage the rear seat
backrests in an upright position after you have
installed the Top Tether belt or if the extended
cargo compartment is not being used. Push
and pull the rear seat backrests to check
whether they are engaged correctly. The rear
seat backrest may fold down if it is not
engaged correctly. The child restraint system
is then no longer supported correctly or held
in position and can no longer perform its
intended function. This can cause serious or
even fatal injuries.
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between a child restraint system, secured
with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,
and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk
of injury even further.
The Top Tether anchorage points are installed
on the rear side of the rear seat backrests.
XMove head restraint : upwards.
XRelease rear seat backrest = and fold it
forwards (Y page 240).
XRoute Top Tether belt B under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
XHook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt
B into Top Tether anchorage ?.
Children in the vehicle 55
Safety
Z
Make sure that:
RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top
Tether anchorage ? as shown.
RTop Tether belt B is not twisted.
RTop Tether belt B is routed between rear
seat backrest = and cargo
compartment cover ; if cargo
compartment cover ; is installed.
XSwing back rear seat backrest = until it
engages.
The red lock verification indicator is no
longer visible.
XMove head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (Y page 90). Make
sure that you do not interfere with the
correct routing of Top Tether belt B.
XInstall the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system with Top Tether. Comply
with the manufacturer's installation
instructions when doing so. Make sure that
Top Tether belt B is tight.
56 Children in the vehicle
Safety
Problems with the air bag deactivation system
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The 45
indicator lamp on the
center console is lit.
A special Mercedes-Benz child restraint system with a
transponder for air bag deactivation system has been installed to
the front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag has
therefore been disabled as desired.
GWARNING
There is no child restraint system installed on the front-passenger
seat. The air bag deactivation system is malfunctioning.
It is also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp lights up and/
or the 45 indicator lamp does not light up briefly when you
switch the ignition on.
There is a risk of injury.
XRemove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat,
for example:
RLaptop
RMobile phone
RCards with transponders, such as ski passes or access cards
If the 45 indicator lamp remains lit:
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Activate the child-proof locks for the rear
doors and the override switch for the rear
windows when children are travelling in the
vehicle. Otherwise, the children could open
doors or side windows while the vehicle is in
motion and injure themselves or others.
GWARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. The children
could:
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,
Children in the vehicle 57
Safety
Z
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function
If children open a door, they could injure other
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
GWARNING
Children could open a rear door from inside
the vehicle. This could result in serious
injuries or an accident. Therefore, when
children ride in the rear always secure the rear
doors with the child-proof locks.
You can secure each door individually with
the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
opened from inside the vehicle. When the
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
from the outside.
XTo activate: press the child-proof lock
lever up in the direction of arrow :.
XMake sure that the child-proof locks are
working properly.
XTo deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Override feature for the rear side
windows
GWARNING
When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,
activate the override switch. Otherwise, the
children could be injured, e.g. by trapping
themselves in the rear side window.
XTo activate/deactivate: press button :.
If indicator lamp is lit, operation of the rear
side windows is disabled. Operation is only
possible using the switches in the driver's
door. If the indicator lamp is off, operation
is possible using the switches in the rear
compartment.
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 64)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 59)
RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST (adaptive
Brake Assist and distance warning signal)
(Y page 60)
RAdaptive brake lights (Y page 62)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 62)
REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 64)
58 Driving safety systems
Safety
RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 64)
(Y page 64)
RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 64)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or
become distracted, the driving safety
systems can neither reduce the risk of
accident nor override the laws of physics.
Driving safety systems are merely aids
designed to assist driving. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in
good time. Always adapt your driving style to
suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic
conditions and maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
iThe driving safety systems described only
work as effectively as possible when there
is adequate contact between the tires and
the road surface. Pay particular attention
to the information regarding tires,
recommended minimum tire tread depths
etc. in the "Wheels and tires" section
(Y page 298).
In wintry driving conditions, always use
winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,
snow chains. Only in this way will the
driving safety systems described in this
section work as effectively as possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Important safety notes
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section for driving safety systems
(Y page 59).
GWARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking
characteristics may be severely impaired.
Additionally, further driving safety systems
are deactivated. There is an increased danger
of skidding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 225) and
display messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster (Y page 201).
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
This allows you to continue steering the
vehicle when braking.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface
conditions. ABS works on slippery roads,
even if you only brake gently.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out when the engine is running.
Braking
XIf ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal vigorously until the braking
situation is over.
XTo make a full brake application:
depress the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
a pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions, and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 59).
Driving safety systems 59
Safety
Z
GWARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
BAS operates in emergency braking
situations. If you depress the brake pedal
quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking
force, thus shortening the stopping distance.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
General notes
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists of
the Adaptive Brake Assist and the distance
warning function, which are described in the
following.
Distance warning function
Important safety notes
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section for driving safety systems
(Y page 59).
GWARNING
The distance warning function does not react:
Rto people or animals
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rwhen cornering
Thus, the distance warning function cannot
provide a warning in all critical situations.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
The distance warning function cannot always
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
situations.
In such cases, the distance warning function
may:
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Rnot give a warning
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and do not rely solely on the
distance warning function.
Function
XTo activate/deactivate: activate or
deactivate the distance warning function in
the on-board computer (Y page 195).
If the distance warning function is activated,
the Ä symbol appears in the multifunction
display unless the HOLD function is active
(Y page 168).
On vehicles with Active Parking Assist, the
Ä symbol is displayed when P is engaged
or you are driving faster than 22 mph
(35 km/h).
The distance warning function can help you
to minimize the risk of a front-end collision
with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of
such a collision. If the distance warning
function detects that there is a risk of a
collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. The distance warning function
cannot prevent a collision without your
intervention.
Starting at a speed of around 20 mph
(30 km/h), this function warns you if you
rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An
intermittent warning tone will then sound and
the · distance warning lamp will light up
in the instrument cluster.
XBrake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
or
XTake evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.
For the distance warning function to assist
you when driving, the function must be
activated in the on-board computer and be
operational (Y page 195).
60 Driving safety systems
Safety
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated driving conditions may cause the
system to display unnecessary warnings.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect
obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle
for an extended period of time.
At speeds up to 40 mph (70 km/h), the
distance warning function may also detect
stationary obstacles, for example stopped or
parked vehicles.
If you approach an obstacle and the distance
warning function detects a risk of a collision,
the system will initially alert you both visually
and acoustically.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain
Rinterference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
relative to the center of your vehicle
Following damage to the front end of the
vehicle, have the configuration and operation
of the radar sensor checked at a qualified
specialist workshop. This also applies to
collisions at low speeds where there is no
visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
Adaptive Brake Assist
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section for driving safety systems
(Y page 59).
GWARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic
situations. In these cases, Adaptive Brake
Assist may not intervene. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
GWARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
Rto people or animals
Rto oncoming vehicles
Rto crossing traffic
Rto stationary obstacles
Rwhen cornering
As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking
assistance in hazardous situations at speeds
greater than 20 mph (30 km/h) and uses
radar sensor technology to assess the traffic
situation.
With the help of a sensor system, adaptive
Brake Assist can detect obstacles that are in
the path of your vehicle for an extended
period of time.
Should you approach an obstacle and
Adaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk of
collision, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates the
braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end
collision. Should you apply the brakes
vigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist will
automatically increase the braking force to a
level suitable for the traffic conditions.
XKeep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if:
Ryou release the brake pedal.
Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end
collision.
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
vehicle.
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Driving safety systems 61
Safety
Z
Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph
(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable
of reacting to moving objects that have
already been recognized as such at least once
over the period of observation. Adaptive
Brake Assist does not react to stationary
obstacles.
If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due
to a malfunction in the radar sensor system,
the brake system remains available with full
brake boosting effect and BAS.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if there is:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain
Rinterference by other radar sources
Rthere are strong radar reflections, for
example in parking garages
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
relative to the center of your vehicle
Following damage to the front end of the
vehicle, have the configuration and operation
of the radar sensor checked at a qualified
specialist workshop. This also applies to
collisions at low speeds where there is no
visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
Adaptive brake lights
If you brake sharply from a speed of more
than 50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS
or Adaptive Brake Assist, the brake lamps
flash rapidly. In this way, traffic traveling
behind you is warned in an even more
noticeable manner.
If you brake sharply to a standstill from a
speed of more than 70 km/h, the hazard
warning lamps are activated automatically. If
the brakes are applied again, the brake lamps
light up continuously. The hazard warning
lamps switch off automatically if you travel
faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off
the hazard warning lamps using the hazard
warning button (Y page 101).
iAdaptive brake lamps are only available in
certain countries.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 59).
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,
i.e. power transmission between the tires and
the road surface.
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the
vehicle. The engine output is also modified to
keep the vehicle on the desired course within
physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when
pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®
can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.
ETS (Electronic Traction System)
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section for driving safety systems
(Y page 59).
ETS traction control is part of ESP®.
ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if
they spin. This enables you to pull away and
accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example
if the road surface is slippery on one side.
ETS remains active when you deactivate
ESP®.
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further
driving safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
62 Driving safety systems
Safety
! When testing the electric parking brake
on a braking dynamometer, switch off the
ignition. Application of the brakes by
ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake
system.
When towing your vehicle with the front axle
raised, observe the notes on
ESP®(Y page 293).
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF
warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights
up continuously when the engine is running.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the
å ESP® OFF warning lamp are lit
continuously, ESP® is not available due to a
malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 227) and display messages which
may be shown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 201).
iOnly use wheels with the recommended
tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function
properly.
Characteristics of ESP®
General information
ESP® is activated automatically when the
engine is started.
If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP® intervenes:
XDo not deactivate ESP® under any
circumstances.
XOnly depress the accelerator pedal as far
as necessary when pulling away.
XAdapt your driving style to suit the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
Vehicles with the ECO start/stop function
Deactivating/activating ESP®
Important safety notes
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section for driving safety systems
(Y page 59).
You can select between the following states
of ESP®:
RESP® is activated.
RESP® is deactivated.
GWARNING
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer
stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased
risk of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP® in the situations
described in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the
following situations:
Rwhen using snow chains
Rin deep snow
Ron sand or gravel
iActivate ESP® as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the
vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a
wheel starts to spin.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP® deactivated.
You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the
on-board computer.
XTo deactivate:(Y page 194).
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
XTo activate:(Y page 194).
The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Driving safety systems 63
Safety
Z
Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated
If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes. In such
situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP®:
RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and
the drive wheels are able to spin. The
spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
action, which provides better grip.
RETS is still active.
RESP® still provides support when you
brake.
EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
iObserve the "Important safety notes"
section for driving safety systems
(Y page 59).
GWARNING
If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can
still lock, e.g. under full braking. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and
warning lamps (Y page 225) as well as
display messages (Y page 203).
EBD monitors and controls the brake
pressure on the rear wheels to improve
driving stability while braking.
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
and offers increased braking comfort. In
addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE
BRAKE also has the HOLD function
(Y page 168) and hill start assist
(Y page 136). For further information, see
Driving tips (Y page 154).
STEER CONTROL
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering
wheel in the direction required for vehicle
stabilization.
This steering assistance is provided in
particular if:
Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on
a wet or slippery road surface when you
brake
Rthe vehicle starts to skid
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will not receive
steering support from STEER CONTROL.
Power steering will, however, continue to
function.
Theft deterrent locking system
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey.
XTo activate: remove the SmartKey from
the ignition lock.
XTo deactivate: switch on the ignition.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a valid
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
iThe immobilizer is always deactivated
when you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be
started when the starter battery is fully
charged, the immobilizer may be faulty.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
64 Theft deterrent locking system
Safety
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
XTo arm: lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm
system is armed after approximately
15 seconds.
XTo disarm: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey.
or
XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Ra door
Rthe tailgate
Rthe hood
XTo stop the alarm: insert the SmartKey
into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
or
XPress the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you
close the open door that triggered it, for
example.
iIf the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a
call to the Customer Assistance Center
automatically. The Tele Aid system will
initiate the call provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid
service.
Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated
properly.
Rthe necessary mobile phone, power
supply and GPS coverage are available.
Theft deterrent locking system 65
Safety
Z
66
Useful information .............................. 68
SmartKey ............................................. 68
Doors .................................................... 73
Cargo compartment ............................ 75
Side windows ...................................... 77
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ........................................ 80
67
Opening and closing
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
SmartKey
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of
parking position P.
Rstarting the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
GWARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
GWARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be
unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This
could cause the engine to be switched off.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to
the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings
before inserting the SmartKey into the
ignition lock.
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong
magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote
control function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile
phone or another SmartKey
Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
foil
Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case
SmartKey functions
:& To lock the vehicle
;% To unlock the vehicle
XTo unlock centrally: press button ;.
If you do not open the vehicle within
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed
again.
68 SmartKey
Opening and closing
XTo lock centrally: press button :.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
Rthe doors
Rthe tailgate
Rthe fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
and three times when locking.
iWhen it is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer (Y page 198).
iYou can also set an audible signal to
confirm that the vehicle has been locked.
The audible signal can be activated and
deactivated using the on-board computer
(Y page 199).
Changing the settings of the locking
system
You can change the settings of the locking
system. When you then unlock the vehicle
only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
are unlocked. This is useful if you frequently
travel on your own.
XTo change the setting: press and hold
down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six
seconds until the battery check lamp
(Y page 70) flashes twice.
iIf the setting of the locking system is
changed within the signal range of the
vehicle, pressing the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
XTo unlock the driver's door: press the
% button once.
XTo unlock centrally: press the %
button twice.
XTo lock centrally: press the & button.
XTo restore the factory settings: press
and hold down the % and & buttons
simultaneously for approximately six
seconds until the battery check lamp
flashes twice (Y page 70).
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 65).
There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
XPress the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
or
XInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
automatically.
XTo unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Removing the mechanical key
XPush release catch : in the direction of
the arrow and at the same time remove
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
SmartKey 69
Opening and closing
Z
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive
substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can
result in severe health problems. There is a
risk of fatal injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National
guidelines must be observed during disposal.
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Checking the battery
XPress the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
XChange the battery (Y page 70).
iIf the SmartKey battery is checked within
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
pressing the & or % button:
Rlocks or
Runlocks the vehicle
iYou can get a battery at any qualified
specialist workshop.
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
XTake the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 69).
XPress mechanical key ; into the opening
in the SmartKey in the direction of the
arrow until battery tray cover : opens.
When doing so, do not hold cover : shut.
XRemove battery tray cover :.
XRepeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
XInsert the new battery with the positive
terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free
cloth to do so.
70 SmartKey
Opening and closing
XMake sure that the surface of the battery is
free from lint, grease and all other forms of
contamination.
XInsert the front tabs of battery tray
cover : and then press to close it.
XInsert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey.
XCheck the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
SmartKey 71
Opening and closing
Z
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You cannot lock or
unlock the vehicle
using the SmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
XTry again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the % or
& button.
If this does not work:
XCheck the SmartKey battery and replace it if necessary
(Y page 70).
XUnlock (Y page 75) or lock (Y page 75) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
XTry again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the % /
& button.
The SmartKey is faulty.
XUnlock (Y page 75) or lock (Y page 75) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
XHave the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a
SmartKey.
XHave the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist
workshop.
XReport the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
XIf necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the
mechanical key.
XReport the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
XIf necessary, have the locks changed as well.
72 SmartKey
Opening and closing
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine cannot be
started using the
SmartKey.
The on-board voltage is too low.
XSwitch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
XCheck the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 285).
or
XJump-start the vehicle (Y page 289).
or
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using the
SmartKey.
The steering lock is mechanically blocked.
XRemove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While
doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.
Doors
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of
parking position P.
Rstarting the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
GWARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
XTo unlock a front door: pull door
handle ;.
Locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
Doors 73
Opening and closing
Z
XTo open a front door: pull door
handle ;.
XTo unlock a rear door: pull up locking
knob :.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
XTo open a rear door: pull door handle ;.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can open the
rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they
are secured by the child-proof lock
(Y page 58).
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 65).
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside. This can be useful if you wish
to lock the vehicle before pulling away, for
example.
XTo unlock: press button :.
XTo lock: press button ;.
The vehicle locks when all the doors and
the tailgate are closed.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be
locked or unlocked.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can open the
rear doors from inside the vehicle unless they
are secured by the child-proof lock
(Y page 58).
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 65).
If the vehicle has been locked using the
locking button for the central locking, or has
been locked automatically, and a door is
opened from the inside:
Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had
previously been fully unlocked
Ronly the door which has been opened form
the inside is unlocked if only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked
Automatic locking feature
XTo deactivate: press and hold button :
for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
XTo activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
iIf you press one of the two buttons and
do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
already been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning.
74 Doors
Opening and closing
You could therefore lock yourself out if:
Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
You can also switch the automatic locking
function on and off using the on-board
computer (Y page 198).
Unlocking the driver's door
(mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 65).
XTake the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 69).
XInsert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
XTurn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
XTurn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
XInsert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey.
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
XOpen the driver's door.
XClose the front-passenger door, the rear
doors and the tailgate.
XPress the locking button (Y page 74).
XCheck whether the locking knobs on the
front-passenger door and the rear doors
are still visible. Press down the locking
knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 73).
XClose the driver's door.
XTake the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 69).
XInsert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
XTurn the mechanical key clockwise as far
as it will go to position 1.
XTurn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
XMake sure that the doors and the tailgate
are locked.
XInsert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey.
iIf you lock the vehicle as described above,
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-
theft alarm system is not armed.
Cargo compartment
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running,
Cargo compartment 75
Opening and closing
Z
particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust
fumes could enter the passenger
compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the
tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
GWARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
iThe opening dimensions of the tailgate
can be found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 335).
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the cargo compartment. Observe the
loading guidelines (Y page 236).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo
compartment. You could otherwise lock
yourself out.
The tailgate can be:
Ropened and closed manually from outside
Runlocked from inside with the mechanical
key
Opening/closing from outside
Opening
XPress the % button on the SmartKey.
XPull handle :.
XRaise the tailgate.
Closing
XPull the tailgate down using handle :.
XAllow the tailgate to drop into the lock.
XIf necessary, lock the vehicle with the
& button on the SmartKey.
Tailgate emergency release
If the tailgate can no longer be opened from
outside the vehicle, use the emergency
release on the inside of the tailgate.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the
rear when opened. Therefore, make sure
that there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate.
iThe opening dimensions of the tailgate
can be found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 335).
76 Cargo compartment
Opening and closing
You can reach the emergency release via the
cargo compartment. Fold the rear backrests
forward (Y page 240).
XTake the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (Y page 69).
XInsert mechanical key ; into the opening
in paneling :.
XTurn mechanical key ; 90° clockwise.
XPush mechanical key ; in the direction of
the arrow and open the tailgate.
Side windows
Important safety notes
GWARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
in the closing area could become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the
switch or press the switch to open the side
window again.
GWARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in
the vehicle.
Side window reversing feature
The side windows are equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts a side window during the
closing process, the side window opens again
automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
attention when closing a side window.
GWARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement
Rduring resetting
Rwhen closing the side window again
manually immediately after automatic
reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again.
Opening and closing the side
windows
The switches for all side windows are located
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
each door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take
precedence.
Side windows 77
Opening and closing
Z
:Front left
;Front right
=Rear right
?Rear left
iWhen the override feature for the side
windows is activated (Y page 58), the side
windows cannot be operated from the rear.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
XTo open: press the corresponding switch.
XTo open fully: press the corresponding
switch beyond the point of resistance.
Automatic closing is started.
XTo close: pull the corresponding switch.
XTo close fully: pull the corresponding
switch beyond the pressure point.
Automatic closing is started.
XTo interrupt the automatic opening/
closing: press/pull the corresponding
switch again.
iIf you press the switch beyond the point
of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by operating the
switch again.
iYou can continue to operate the side
windows after you switch off the engine or
remove the SmartKey. This function is
available for up to five minutes or until the
driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
Convenience opening
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to
carry out the following functions
simultaneously:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen the side windows
Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel and the roller sunblinds
iThe convenience opening feature can
only be operated using the SmartKey. The
SmartKey must be close to the driver's
door handle.
XPoint the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle.
XPress and hold the % button until the
side windows and the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired
position.
If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the
roller sunblinds are opened first.
XPress and hold the % button again until
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is in the desired position.
XTo interrupt convenience opening:
release the % button.
Convenience closing feature
GWARNING
When the convenience closing feature is
operating, parts of the body could become
trapped in the closing area of the side window
and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of
injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is
operating. Make sure that no body parts are
in close proximity during the closing
procedure.
78 Side windows
Opening and closing
When you lock the vehicle, you can
simultaneously:
Rclose the side windows
Rclose the panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the
roller sunblinds.
iThe SmartKey must be close to the
driver's door handle.
XPoint the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's
door handle.
XPress and hold the & button until the
side windows and the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
XMake sure that all the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel are closed.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
XPress and hold the & button again until
the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel close.
XTo interrupt convenience closing:
release the & button.
Resetting the side windows
You must reset each side window if:
Rthe side window opens again slightly after
being closed fully.
Rthe side window can no longer be fully
opened or closed.
XClose all the doors.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is
completely closed (Y page 77).
XHold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
XImmediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side
window is completely closed (Y page 77).
XHold the switch for an additional second.
XIf the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly.
If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Problems with the side windows
GWARNING
If you close a side window again immediately
after it has been blocked or reset, the side
window closes with increased or maximum
force. The reversing feature is then not active.
Parts of the body could be trapped in the
closing area in the process. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the
closing area. To stop the closing process,
release the switch or push the switch again to
reopen the side window.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed
because it is blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window guide.
XRemove the objects.
XClose the side window.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed
and you cannot see the cause. If a side
window is obstructed during closing and
reopens again slightly:
XImmediately after the window blocks, pull
the corresponding switch again until the
side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased
force.
Side windows 79
Opening and closing
Z
If a side window is obstructed again during
closing and reopens again slightly:
XImmediately after the window blocks, pull
the corresponding switch again until the
side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the anti-
entrapment feature.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel
Important safety notes
In the following section, the term "sliding
sunroof" refers to the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel.
GWARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof,
body parts in close proximity could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the opening and closing
procedures.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be
stopped.
GWARNING
If children operate the sliding sunroof they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions
may occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
be damaged.
! The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the
sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the
vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be
damaged if water enters the vehicle
interior.
iResonance noises can occur in addition
to the usual airflow noises when the sliding
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof
or open a side window slightly to reduce or
eliminate these noises.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during
the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens
again automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
attention when closing the sliding sunroof.
GWARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
Rover the last 4 mm of the closing movement
Rduring resetting
Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again
manually immediately after automatic
reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
80 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Opening and closing
Operating the sliding sunroof
Overhead control panel
:To raise
;To open
=To close/lower
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
XMake sure that the roller sunblinds are
open.
XPress or pull the 3 switch in the
corresponding direction.
iIf you press the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by operating the
switch again.
The automatic raising feature is available
only when the sliding sunroof is closed.
iYou can continue to operate the sliding
sunroof after switching off the engine or
removing the SmartKey from the ignition
lock. This function remains active for five
minutes or until you open a front door.
Operating the roller sunblinds for the
sliding sunroof
Important safety notes
GWARNING
When opening or closing the roller sunblind,
parts of the body could be trapped between
the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding
sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
When opening or closing make sure that no
parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller
sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be
stopped.
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior
from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can
only be opened and closed together when the
sliding sunroof is closed.
Roller sunblind reversing feature
The roller sunblinds are equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If a solid object
blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the
closing process, the roller sunblind opens
again automatically. However, the automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and does not
relieve you of the responsibility of paying
attention when closing the roller sunblinds.
GWARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small
fingers
Rwhen closing the roller sunblind again
manually immediately after automatic
reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind.
If somebody becomes trapped:
Rrelease the switch immediately, or
Rduring automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The closing process is stopped.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 81
Opening and closing
Z
Opening and closing
Overhead control panel
:To open
;To open
=To close
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress or pull the 3 switch in the
corresponding direction.
iIf you press the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by operating the
switch again.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the
roller sunblinds
If the sliding sunroof or the roller sunblinds
do not move smoothly, reset the sliding
sunroof and the roller sunblinds:
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress the 3 switch to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow ; and
hold it until the sliding sunroof has opened
about 4 in (10 cm).
XPull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
XKeep the 3 switch pulled for an
additional second.
XPress the 3 switch to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow ; and
hold it until the roller sunblinds are open
about 4 in (10 cm).
XPull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.
XKeep the 3 switch pulled for an
additional second.
XMake sure that the sliding sunroof
(Y page 81) and the roller sunblinds
(Y page 82) can be fully opened and closed
again.
XIf this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
GWARNING
If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after a
malfunction or voltage supply interruption,
then the backing up function will malfunction
or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with
increased or maximum force. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in
the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
In such or similar situations always make sure
that no parts of the body are in the closing
area. Always reset the sliding sunroof after a
malfunction or voltage supply interruption.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
opened or closed as a result of a
malfunction, contact a qualified specialist
workshop.
Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed
and you cannot see the cause. If the sliding
sunroof is obstructed during closing and
reopens again slightly:
XImmediately after it blocks, pull the 3
switch down again to the point of
82 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Opening and closing
resistance until the sliding sunroof is
closed
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased
force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again
during closing and then reopens slightly:
XImmediately after it blocks, pull the 3
switch down again to the point of
resistance until the sliding sunroof is
closed
The sliding sunroof is closed without the
anti-entrapment feature.
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 83
Opening and closing
Z
84
Useful information .............................. 86
Correct driver's seat position ............ 86
Seats .................................................... 87
Steering wheel .................................... 91
Mirrors ................................................. 92
Memory functions ............................... 95
85
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
Correct driver's seat position
Observe the safety guidelines on seat
adjustment (Y page 87).
XMake sure that seat = is adjusted
properly.
Manual seat adjustment (Y page 88)
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 88)
When adjusting the seat, make sure that:
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air
bag as possible.
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright
position.
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.
Ryou have moved the backrest to an
almost vertical position.
Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so
that your thighs are gently supported.
Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
XCheck whether the head restraint is
adjusted properly (Y page 89).
When doing so, make sure that you have
adjusted the head restraint so that the back
of your head is supported at eye level by
the center of the head restraint.
Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 91).
XMake sure that steering wheel : is
adjusted properly.
Adjusting the steering wheel
(Y page 91)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly.
Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 45).
XCheck whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 47).
The seat belt should:
Rfit snugly across your body
Rbe routed across the middle of your
shoulder
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the
hip joints
XBefore starting off, adjust the rear-view
mirror and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 92) in such a way that you have
a good view of road and traffic conditions.
XVehicles with a memory function: save
the seat and exterior mirror settings
(Y page 95).
86 Correct driver's seat position
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Seats
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
GWARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
GWARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat
adjustment buttons and become trapped.
There is a risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under
the lever assembly of the seat adjustment
system.
GWARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
GWARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if the backrest is not in the
upright position. When braking or in the event
of an accident, you could slide underneath the
seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck
injuries, for example. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the seat
is in the upright position.
GWARNING
If head restraints are not installed and
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
protection as intended. There is an increased
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints
installed. Before driving off, make sure for
every vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.
GWARNING
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained on the rear
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
we strongly recommend that children be
placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriately sized
child restraint system or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child. For additional information, see the
"Children in the vehicle" section.
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat
Seats 87
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats.
Rclean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section.
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
The seats should only be occupied by
passengers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating
materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,
seat covers, child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats when resetting
the seats. There is a risk that the seats
and/or the objects could be damaged.
iThe head restraints in the front and rear
seats can be removed.1
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
iFurther related subjects:
RLuggage compartment enlargement
(folding down the rear seats)
(Y page 240)
Adjusting the seats manually
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
XLift handle : and slide the seat forwards
or backwards.
XRelease lever : again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position.
Backrest angle
XRelieve the pressure on the backrest.
XTurn handwheel ? forwards or backwards.
Seat height
XPull handle = upwards or push it down
repeatedly until the seat has reached the
desired height.
Seat cushion angle
Adjust the angle so that your thighs are lightly
supported.
XTurn handwheel ; forwards or backwards.
Adjusting the seats electrically
:Head restraint height2
;Seat cushion angle
=Seat height
?Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
ABackrest angle
1Not on vehicles with sports seats.
2Not available on vehicles with sports seats.
88 Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
iYou can store the seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 95).
Adjusting the head restraints
GWARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
GWARNING
If head restraints are not installed and
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
protection as intended. There is an increased
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints
installed. Before driving off, make sure for
every vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.
Adjusting the head restraints manually
Adjusting the head restraint height
XTo raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
XTo lower: press release catch : in the
direction of the arrow and push the head
restraint down to the desired position.
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the
head restraint
With this function you can adjust the distance
between the head restraint and the back of
the seat occupant's head.
XTo adjust forwards: pull the head restraint
forwards in the direction of the arrow until
it engages.
There are several notches.
XTo move backwards: press and hold
release button : and push the head
restraint backwards.
XWhen the head restraint is in the desired
position, release the button and make sure
that the head restraint is engaged in
position.
Adjusting the height of the head
restraints electrically
XTo adjust the head restraint height: slide
the switch for head restraint adjustment
(Y page 88) up or down in the direction of
the arrow.
Seats 89
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Rear seat head restraints
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
XTo raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
XTo lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Removing and installing the rear seat
head restraints
GWARNING
If head restraints are not installed and
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide
protection as intended. There is an increased
risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.
in the event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints
installed. Before driving off, make sure for
every vehicle occupant that the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at about eye level.
The rear head restraints on the outer seats
can be removed and re-installed.
XFold the seat backrest slightly forwards in
order to remove the head restraint
(Y page 240).
XTo remove: pull the head restraint up to
the stop.
XPress release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
XTo re-install: insert the head restraint so
that the notches on the bar are on the left
when viewed in the direction of travel.
XPush the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum
support for your back.
:To raise the backrest contour
;To soften the backrest contour
=To lower the backrest contour
?To harden the backrest contour
90 Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Switching the seat heating on/off
Activating/deactivating
GWARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high
temperatures may be affected or they may
even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk
of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down
from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
eight minutes.
The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
level 1.
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
XTo switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
XTo switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
iIf the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
Problems with the seat heating
The seat heating has switched off
prematurely or cannot be switched on. The
vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low
because too many electrical consumers are
switched on.
XSwitch off electrical consumers that you do
not need, such as the rear window
defroster or interior lighting.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
GWARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
Rfasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
GWARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Adjusting the steering wheel
GWARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering
wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
Steering wheel 91
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
:Release lever
;To adjust the steering wheel height
=To adjust the steering wheel position
(fore-and-aft adjustment)
XPush release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
XAdjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
XPush release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.
XCheck if the steering column is locked.
When doing so, try to push the steering
wheel up or down or try to move it in the
fore-and-aft direction.
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
XAnti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever :
forwards or back.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
GWARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the
distance from road users traveling behind,
e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an
accident.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
XPress button : for the left-hand exterior
mirror or button ; for the right-hand
exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button = as long
as the indicator lamp is lit.
XPress adjustment button = up, down, or
to the left or right until you have adjusted
the exterior mirror to the correct position.
You should have a good overview of traffic
conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
field of vision.
The exterior mirrors are automatically heated
after starting the vehicle if the rear window
92 Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
defroster is switched on and the outside
temperature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to
10 minutes.
iYou can also heat up the exterior mirrors
manually by switching on the rear window
defroster.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
XBriefly press button :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
iMake sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
iIf you are driving faster than
30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold
in the exterior mirrors.
Setting the exterior mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or
completely discharged, the exterior mirrors
must be reset. The exterior mirrors will
otherwise not fold in when you select the
"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the
on-board computer (Y page 199).
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in
position 1 in the ignition lock.
XBriefly press button :.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
is activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 199):
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the
outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again
automatically as soon as you unlock the
vehicle and then open the driver's or front-
passenger door.
iIf the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
XVehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
XVehicles with electrically folding
exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-
folding button (Y page 93) until you hear a
click and then the mirrors engage in
position.
The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(Y page 92).
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function is
only available if the vehicle is equipped with
the "Mirrors package".
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
glare mode if:
Rthe ignition is switched on and
Rincident light from headlamps strikes the
sensor in the rear-view mirror.
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting
is switched on.
Mirrors 93
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Parking position for the exterior
mirror on the front-passenger side
General notes
The "Parking position of the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side" function is only
available if the vehicle is equipped with the
"Mirrors package".
Setting and storing the parking position
Using reverse gear
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. You can store this
position.
XMake sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress button ; for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side.
XEngage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position.
XUse adjustment button = to adjust the
exterior mirror. You should see the rear
wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.
The parking position is stored.
iIf you shift the transmission to another
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving
position.
Using the memory button
You can position the front-passenger side
exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage reverse gear. You can store this
position. This setting can be stored using
memory button M ?.
XMake sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress button ; for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side.
XUse adjustment button = to adjust the
exterior mirror. You should see the rear
wheel and the curb in the exterior mirror.
XPress memory button M ? and one of the
arrows on adjustment button = within
three seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
XIf the mirror moves out of position, repeat
the steps.
Calling up a stored parking position
setting
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XAdjust the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side with the corresponding
button (Y page 92).
XEngage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves back to its original position:
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)
Rabout ten seconds after you have
disengaged reverse gear
Rif you press button : for the exterior
mirror on the driver's side
94 Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Memory functions
Storing settings
GWARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
GWARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
you and other vehicle occupants – particularly
children – could become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While the memory function is making
adjustments, make sure that no one has any
body parts in the sweep of the seat. If
somebody becomes trapped, immediately
release the memory function position button.
The adjustment process is stopped.
GWARNING
Children could become trapped if they
activate the memory function, particularly
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
With the memory function, you can store up
to three different settings, e.g. for three
different people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior
mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger
sides
XAdjust the seat (Y page 88).
XAdjust the exterior mirror on the driver's
side (Y page 92).
XBriefly press the M memory button and
then press storage position button 1, 2 or
3 within three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected
preset position. A tone sounds when the
settings have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting
XPress and hold the relevant storage
position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and
exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
iThe setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position
button.
Memory functions 95
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
96
Useful information .............................. 98
Exterior lighting .................................. 98
Interior lighting ................................. 103
Replacing bulbs ................................. 104
Windshield wipers ............................ 111
97
Lights and windshield wipers
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you drive with the lights
switched on even during the daytime. In some
countries, operation of the headlamps varies
due to legal requirements and self-imposed
obligations.
Driving abroad
Conversion to symmetrical low beam
Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low
beam in countries in which traffic drives on
the opposite side of the road from the country
where the vehicle is registered. This prevents
glare to oncoming traffic. When using
symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not
lit as widely and as far ahead as normal.
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified
specialist workshop as close to the border as
possible before driving in these countries.
Conversion to asymmetrical low beam
after returning
Have the headlamps converted back to
asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a
qualified specialist workshop as soon as
possible after crossing the border again.
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using:
Rthe light switch
Rthe combination switch (Y page 100)
Rthe on-board computer (Y page 197)
Light switch
Operation
1WLeft-hand standing lamps
2XRight-hand standing lamps
3TParking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4ÃAutomatic headlamp mode,
controlled by the light sensor
5LLow-beam/high-beam headlamps
BRRear fog lamp
CNFog lamp (only vehicles with front fog
lamps)
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
XTurn the light switch to Ã.
The exterior lighting (except the parking/
standing lamps) switches off automatically if
you:
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey
in position 0.
98 Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
Automatic headlamp mode
GWARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
lighting at all times.
à is the favored light switch setting. The
light setting is automatically selected
according to the brightness of the ambient
light (exception: poor visibility due to weather
conditions such as fog, snow or spray):
RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:
the parking lamps are switched on or off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
RWith the engine running: if you have
activated the daytime running lamps
function via the on-board computer, the
daytime running lamps or the low-beam
headlamps and parking lamps are switched
on or off automatically depending on the
brightness of the ambient light.
XTo switch on automatic headlamp
mode: turn the light switch to Ã.
The daytime running lamps improve the
visibility of your vehicle during the day. The
daytime running lamps function is required by
law in Canada.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from
a drive position to P, the daytime running
lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after
three minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is
stationary and in high ambient light: if you
turn the light switch to T, you turn on the
daytime running lamps and parking lamps.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to L, the manual settings take
precedence over the daytime running lamps.
Low-beam headlamps
Even if the light sensor does not detect that
it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam
headlamps switch on when the ignition is
switched on and the light switch is set to the
L position. This is a particularly useful
function in the event of rain and fog.
XTo switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
XTurn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
Front fog lamps
In conditions where visibility is poor due to
fog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve
visibility as well as making it easier for other
road users to see you. They can be operated
together with the parking lamps or together
with the parking lamps and low-beam
headlamps.
XTo switch on the front fog lamps: turn
the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position
2 or start the engine.
XTurn the light switch to L or Ã.
XPress the N button.
The green N indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
XTo switch off the front fog lamps: press
the N button.
The green N indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Only vehicles with front fog lamps are
equipped with the "fog lamp" function;
information on the fog lamp function for
vehicles with Intelligent Light System
(Y page 102).
Exterior lighting 99
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of
thick fog. Please take note of the country-
specific regulations for the use of rear fog
lamps.
XTo switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2
or start the engine.
XTurn the light switch to L or Ã.
XPress the R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
XTo switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Parking lamps
! If the battery has been excessively
discharged, the parking lamps or standing
lamps are automatically switched off to
enable the next engine start. Always park
your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit
according to legal standards. Avoid the
continuous use of the T parking lamps
for several hours. If possible, switch on the
X right or the W left standing lamp.
XTo switch on: turn the light switch to
T.
The green T indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is
illuminated.
XTo switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is
in position 0.
XTurn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).
Combination switch
Turn signal
:High-beam headlamps
;Turn signal, right
=High-beam flasher
?Turn signal, left
XTo indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
XTo indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction
of arrow ; or ?.
High-beam headlamps
XTo switch on the high-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
XTurn the light switch to L or Ã.
XPress the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
arrow :.
In the à position, the high-beam
headlamps are only switched on when it is
dark and the engine is running.
100 Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
The blue K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the high-
beam headlamps are switched on.
XTo switch off the high-beam
headlamps: move the combination switch
back to its normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
iVehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active,
it controls activation of the high-beam
headlamps (Y page 102).
High-beam flasher
XTo switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the
engine.
XPull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.
Hazard warning lamps
The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on if:
Ran air bag is deployed
Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a
speed of more than 45mph (70 km/h) and
comes to a standstill
XTo switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
a turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the
corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
XTo switch off the hazard warning
lamps: press button :.
The hazard warning lamps switch off
automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed
of over 6mph (10km/h) again after a full
brake application.
iThe hazard warning lamps still operate if
the ignition is switched off.
Headlamp cleaning system
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if
the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is
operated five times while the lights are on and
the engine is running (Y page 111). When you
switch off the ignition, the automatic
headlamp cleaning system is reset and
counting is resumed from 0.
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the
illumination of the road over a wide angle in
the direction you are turning, enabling better
visibility in tight bends, for example. The
cornering light function can only be activated
when the low-beam headlamps are switched
on.
Exterior lighting 101
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Active:
Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel.
Rif you are driving at speeds between
25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)
and turn the steering wheel.
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn
signal or turn the steering wheel to the
straight-ahead position.
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
time, but is automatically switched off after
no more than three minutes.
Extended range fog lamps
The extended range fog lamps reduce the
glare experienced by the driver and improve
the illumination of the edge of the road.
Active: if you are driving at speeds below
40 mph (70 km/h) and you switch on the rear
fog lamp.
Not active: if, following activation, you are
driving at speeds above 60 mph (100 km/h)
or if you switch off the rear fog lamp.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
GWARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
may fail to recognize other road users that
have lights, or may recognize them too late.
In this or similar situations, the automatic
high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated
or activated regardless. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.
You can use this function to set the
headlamps to change between low beam and
high beam automatically. The system
recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either
approaching from the opposite direction or
traveling in front of your vehicle, and
consequently switches the headlamps from
high beam to low beam.
The system automatically adapts the low-
beam headlamp range depending on the
distance to the other vehicle. Once the
system no longer detects any other vehicles,
it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control
panel.
102 Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
XTo activate: activate the Adaptive
Highbeam Assist function using the on-
board computer (Y page 197).
XTurn the light switch to Ã.
XPress the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :
(Y page 100).
The _ indicator lamp in the
multifunction display lights up if it is dark
and the light sensor activates the low-beam
headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above
approximately 28 mph (45 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the
vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above
approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no
other road users have been detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below
approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or other
road users have been detected or the roads
are adequately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _
indicator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.
XTo deactivate: move the combination
switch back to its normal position.
The _ indicator lamp in the
multifunction display goes out.
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
The headlamps may fog up on the inside if
there is high atmospheric humidity.
XSwitch on the lights and drive off.
The level of moisture diminishes,
depending on the length of the journey and
the weather conditions (humidity and
temperature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish:
XHave the headlamps checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
:p To switch the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off
;c To switch the front interior lighting
on
=v To switch the on/off
Interior lighting 103
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
?| To switch the front interior lighting/
automatic interior lighting control off
Ap To switch the right-hand front
reading lamp on/off
BTo switch the automatic interior lighting
control on
Rear-compartment overhead control panel
:To switch the reading lamp on/off
Interior lighting control
Important notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The brightness of the ambient lighting may be
set using the on-board computer
(Y page 197).
Automatic interior lighting control
XTo switch on: set the switch to center
position B.
XTo switch off: set the switch to the |
position.
The interior lighting automatically switches
on if you:
Runlock the vehicle
Ropen a door
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
The interior light is activated for a short while
when the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock. You can activate this delayed
switch-off using the on-board computer
(Y page 198).
Manual interior lighting control
XTo switch the front interior lighting on:
set the switch to the c position.
XTo switch the interior lighting off: set the
switch to the | position or (if the door
is closed) to the center position.
XTo switch the interior lighting on/off:
press the u button.
XTo switch the reading lamps on/off:
press the p button.
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
XTo switch off the crash-responsive
emergency lighting: press the hazard
warning lamp button.
or
XLock and then unlock the vehicle using the
key.
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
Xenon bulbs
GDANGER
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get
an electric shock if you remove the cover of
the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical
contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.
Never touch the parts or the electrical
contacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work
on the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
104 Replacing bulbs
Lights and windshield wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,
you can recognize this by the following: the
cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves
from the top to the bottom and back again
when you start the engine. For this to be
observed, the lights must be switched on
before starting the engine.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Other bulbs
GWARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot
when operating. If you change a bulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
There is a risk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down before
changing a bulb.
There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs
that you cannot replace. Replace only the
bulbs listed (Y page 105). Have the bulbs that
you cannot replace yourself changed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
If you require assistance changing bulbs,
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with
your bare hands. Even minor contamination
can burn into the glass surface and reduce
the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-
free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb
when installing.
Only use bulbs of the correct type.
If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
a qualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types
You can change the following bulbs. The bulb
type can be found in the legend.
Halogen headlamps
:Turn signal lamp:3457
;High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
=Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W LL
?Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
Vehicles with Intelligent Light System
:Cornering lamp: H7 55 W
Replacing bulbs 105
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Tail lamp (halogen headlamps)
:Tail lamp/turn signal lamp/brake lamp:
P 21 W
;Inoperative
=Side marker lamp: P 21 W
?Rear fog lamp: P 21 W
ABackup lamp: W 16 W
Tail lamp (Bi-Xenon headlamps)
:Turn signal lamp/brake lamp: P 21 W
;Rear fog lamp: H 21 W
=Backup lamp: W 16 W
License plate lamp (vehicles with halogen
headlamps)
:License plate lamp: C 5 W
Changing the front bulbs
Removing and installing the cover in the
front wheel housing
You must remove the cover from the front
wheel housing before you can change the
front bulbs.
XTo remove: switch off the lights.
XTurn the front wheels inwards.
XTurn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is released.
XPush cover ; down.
XTo install: push cover ; up.
XTurn rotary knob : through 90°.
Cover ; is locked.
106 Replacing bulbs
Lights and windshield wipers
Low-beam headlamps (halogen
headlamps)
GWARNING
These bulbs are pressurized.
They can explode when being changed if:
Rthey are still hot
Rthey hit an object when being removed
Rthey are dropped
There is a risk of injury.
You should wear eye protection and clean
gloves when you are changing a bulb. If
necessary, have bulbs changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
XRemove the cover in the front wheel
housing (Y page 106).
XTurn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
XTurn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
XTake the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
XInsert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
XInsert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
XAlign housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
XReplace the cover in the front wheel
housing (Y page 106).
High-beam headlamps (halogen
headlamps)
GWARNING
These bulbs are pressurized.
They can explode when being changed if:
Rthey are still hot
Rthey hit an object when being removed
Rthey are dropped
There is a risk of injury.
You should wear eye protection and clean
gloves when you are changing a bulb. If
necessary, have bulbs changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
XSwitch off the lights.
XOpen the hood.
XTurn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
XTurn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
XTake the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
XInsert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
XInsert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
XAlign housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
Replacing bulbs 107
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Parking lamps/standing lamps
(halogen headlamps)
XSwitch off the lights.
XOpen the hood.
XTurn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
XPull out bulb holder ;.
XTake the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
XInsert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
XInsert bulb holder ;.
XAlign housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
Turn signals (halogen headlamps)
XSwitch off the lights.
XOpen the hood.
XTurn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
XTake the bulb out of bulb holder :.
XInsert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
XInsert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise
until it engages.
Cornering light function (Intelligent
Light System)
GWARNING
These bulbs are pressurized.
They can explode when being changed if:
Rthey are still hot
Rthey hit an object when being removed
Rthey are dropped
There is a risk of injury.
You should wear eye protection and clean
gloves when you are changing a bulb. If
necessary, have bulbs changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
XSwitch off the lights.
XOpen the hood.
XTurn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
XTurn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
XTake the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
XInsert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
XInsert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
XAlign housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
108 Replacing bulbs
Lights and windshield wipers
Changing the rear bulbs
Opening and closing the side trim
panels
You must open the side trim panel in the
cargo compartment before you can change
the bulbs in the tail lamps.
Left-hand side trim panel
Right-hand side trim panel
XTo open: turn release knob : 90° in the
direction of the arrow and remove side trim
panel ;.
XTo close: insert side trim panel ; and turn
release knob : 90° in the opposite
direction to the arrow.
Tail lamps
Turn signal lamp/tail lamp and brake
lamp
XSwitch off the lights.
XOpen the cargo compartment.
XOpen the side trim panel (Y page 109).
XPress retaining lugs : simultaneously in
the direction of the arrow and pull the bulb
holder out.
Bulb holder
:Tail lamp/brake lamp3
;Inoperative lamps (vehicles without LEDs)
=Side marker lamp (vehicles without LEDs)
XLightly press the corresponding bulb into
the holder, turn it counter-clockwise and
remove it from the bulb holder.
XInsert the corresponding new bulb into the
bulb holder and turn it clockwise.
3Vehicles with LEDs: turn signal/brake light only.
Replacing bulbs 109
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
XAttach the bulb holder and press firmly.
The retaining lugs on the bulb holder
engage audibly.
XClose the side trim panel (Y page 109).
Backup lamp and rear fog lamp
Due to their location, have the bulbs in the
backup lamp and rear fog lamp in the tailgate
changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
XSwitch off the lights.
XOpen the tailgate.
XIn recess ? on the inside of the closing
handle, pry off and remove the upper
section of handle = with a flat and smooth
object, e.g. a screwdriver.
XPull the lower section of handle : using a
sharp, sudden movement to remove it from
the trim and then place it to one side.
XReach under the right-hand side of trim
B and apply a gentle jolting force along the
entire length of the trim in order to unclip
it.
XPull out connector C of the surround
lighting by releasing the latches.
XPlace trim B to one side.
XOn the side where the bulb is to be
changed, unclip the remaining part of trim
D from the assembly using a sudden,
sharp movements, until bulb holder E is
accessible.
XRemove bulb holder E using both sides of
lever F.
110 Replacing bulbs
Lights and windshield wipers
Bulb holder
XRear fog lamp G: lightly press the
corresponding bulb into holder E, turn it
counter-clockwise and remove it from bulb
holder E.
XInsert the new bulb into bulb holder E and
turn it clockwise.
XBackup lamp H: remove the bulb from
bulb holder E.
XInsert the new bulb into bulb holder E.
XRe-insert bulb holder E until you hear
engage audibly.
XPosition trim D and engage it in place by
tapping it with your hand.
XBefore beginning the installation, check
that all the metal clips are inserted in the
parts placed to one side: 2 clips ; in the
upper part of handle = and 5 clips A in
trim B.
XIf not, remove the missing metal clips from
the metal openings in the tailgate and
insert them in the appropriate places.
XTake trim B and connect plug connector
C to the surround lighting.
iThe surround lighting only illuminates
when the tailgate has been shut and
reopened.
XPosition trim B and engage it in place by
tapping it with your hand, starting from the
outside.
XClip in the lower section of handle : again.
XInsert and engage the upper section of
handle = into lower section :.
License plate lamp
XSwitch off the lights.
XOpen the tailgate.
XPosition a screwdriver on lamp lens :
from the outside.
XLever out lamp lens : and remove it.
XReplace the bulb.
XInsert lamp lens : into the license plate
lamp and press it in until it engages.
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers on/
off
! Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry, as this could
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
that has collected on the windshield can
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always
use washer fluid when operating the
windshield wipers.
Windshield wipers 111
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on
the windshield after the vehicle has been
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or
other residues may be the reason for this.
Clean the windshield using washer fluid
after washing the vehicle in an automatic
car wash.
Combination switch
1$ Windshield wiper off
2Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor
set to low sensitivity)
3Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
4° Continuous wipe, slow
5¯ Continuous wipe, fast
Bí Single wipe/î To wipe the
windshield using washer fluid
XSwitch on the ignition.
XTurn the combination switch to the
corresponding position.
! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the
windshield becomes dirty in dry weather
conditions, the windshield wipers may be
activated inadvertently. This could then
damage the windshield wiper blades or
scratch the windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or
Å position, the appropriate wiping
frequency is automatically set according to
the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,
the rain sensor is more sensitive than in
the Ä position, causing the windshield
wipers to wipe more frequently.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield
will no longer be wiped properly. This could
prevent you from observing the traffic
conditions. Replace the wiper blades twice a
year, ideally in spring and fall.
Switching the rear window wiper on/
off
Combination switch
:è Switch
2ô To wipe with washer fluid
3I To switch on intermittent wiping
40 To switch off intermittent wiping
5ô To wipe with washer fluid
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
XTurn switch : on the combination switch
to the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on,
the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk
of injury.
112 Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,
make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper.
! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper
arm has been folded away from the
windshield/rear window.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without
a wiper blade back onto the windshield/
rear window.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release
the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it
falls onto the windshield/rear window, the
windshield/rear window may be damaged
by the force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Changing the windshield wiper blades
Removing the wiper blades
XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
XFold the wiper arm away from the
windshield.
XPress both release clips ;.
XFold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = away from wiper arm ?.
XRemove wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow A.
Installing the wiper blades
XPosition new wiper blade : with
recess B on lug A.
XFold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining
clips ; engage in bracket ?.
XMake sure that wiper blade : is seated
correctly.
XFold the wiper arm back onto the
windshield.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Removing a wiper blade
XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
XFold wiper arm : away from the rear
window until it engages.
XPosition wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
Windshield wipers 113
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
XHold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the direction of the arrow until
it releases.
XRemove wiper blade ;.
Installing a wiper blade
XPlace new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm :.
XHold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to the
arrow until it engages.
XMake sure that wiper blade ; is seated
correctly.
XPosition wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
XFold wiper arm : back onto the rear
window.
114 Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The windshield wipers
are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
XFor safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
XRemove the cause of the obstruction.
XSwitch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers
fail completely.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
XSelect another wiper speed on the combination switch.
XHave the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The spray nozzles are
misaligned.
The windshield washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hits
the center of the windshield. The spray nozzles are misaligned.
XHave the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Windshield wipers 115
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
116
Useful information ............................ 118
Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 118
Operating the climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 123
Setting the air vents ......................... 130
117
Climate control
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
Overview of climate control systems
Important safety notes
Observe the settings recommended on the
following pages. The windows could
otherwise fog up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
Rswitch off climate control only briefly
Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only
briefly
Rswitch on the cooling with air
dehumidification function
Rswitch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
The automatic climate control regulates the
temperature and the humidity of the vehicle
interior and filters out undesirable
substances from the air.
Automatic climate control/dual-zone
automatic climate control is only operational
when the engine is running. Optimum
operation is only achieved with the side
windows and panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel closed.
The residual heat function can only be
activated or deactivated with the ignition
switched off (Y page 129).
iVentilate the vehicle for a brief period
during warm weather, e.g. using the
convenience opening feature (Y page 78).
This will speed up the cooling process and
the desired vehicle interior temperature
will be reached more quickly.
iThe integrated filter can filter out most
particles of dust, and completely filters out
pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount
of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For
this reason, you should always observe the
interval for replacing the filter, which is
specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it
depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
heavy air pollution, the interval may be
shorter than stated in the Maintenance
Booklet.
iIt is possible that the dehumidification
function of the climate control system may
be activated automatically an hour after the
SmartKey has been removed. The vehicle
is then ventilated for 30 minutes.
118 Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
Control panel for automatic climate control
USA only
:To set the temperature (Y page 125)
;To defrost the windshield (Y page 127)
=To set the air distribution (Y page 126)
?To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 129)
ATo set the airflow (Y page 126)
BTo switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 123)
CTo switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 128)
Canada only
:To set the temperature (Y page 125)
;To defrost the windshield (Y page 127)
=To set the air distribution (Y page 126)
Overview of climate control systems 119
Climate control
?To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 129)
ATo set the airflow (Y page 126)
BTo switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 123)
CTo switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 128)
Notes on using automatic climate
control
Automatic climate control
The following contains notes and
recommendations on optimum use of the
automatic climate control.
RSwitch on the air-conditioning system by
turning control knob A clockwise to the
desired position (except position 0).
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
RRecommendation for preventing
fogged up windows with low outside
temperatures or rain: switch ¯ on for
the air distribution and switch P and
O off if possible (Y page 126).
In air-recirculation mode, switch d off
(Y page 129).
Set airflow control A to a setting between
3 and 6(Y page 126).
RRecommendation for rapid cooling or
heating of the vehicle interior: briefly set
airflow control A to a setting between 3
and 6(Y page 126).
RRecommendation for a constant
vehicle interior temperature: set airflow
control A to a setting between 1 and
3(Y page 126).
RRecommendation for air distribution in
the winter: set O and
¯(Y page 126).
Recommendation for air distribution in
the summer: set P or P and
¯(Y page 126).
ROnly use the "windshield defrosting"
function briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could
otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RIf you change the settings of the climate
control system, the climate status display
appears for three seconds at the bottom of
the screen in the COMAND display. See
also the separate COMAND operating
instructions4. You will see the current
settings of the various climate control
functions.
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO
start/stop function only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full
climate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 138).
4Only for vehicles with "COMAND Multimedia System" optional equipment
120 Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
USA only
:To set the temperature, left (Y page 125)
;To set climate control to automatic (Y page 125)
=To defrost the windshield (Y page 127)
?To increase the airflow (Y page 126)
ATo set the air distribution (Y page 126)
BDisplay
CTo activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 129)
DTo switch climate control on/off (Y page 123)
ETo set the temperature, right (Y page 125)
FTo activate/deactivate maximum cooling (Y page 127)
GTo switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 123)
HTo reduce the airflow (Y page 126)
ITo switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 128)
JTo switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 126)
Overview of climate control systems 121
Climate control
Canada only
:To set the temperature, left (Y page 125)
;To set climate control to automatic (Y page 125)
=To defrost the windshield (Y page 127)
?To increase the airflow (Y page 126)
ATo set the air distribution (Y page 126)
BDisplay
CTo activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 129)
DTo switch climate control on/off (Y page 123)
ETo set the temperature, right (Y page 125)
FTo switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 129)
GTo switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 123)
HTo reduce the airflow (Y page 126)
ITo switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 128)
JTo switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 126)
Notes on using dual-zone automatic
climate control
Automatic climate control
The following contains instructions and
recommendations to enable you to get the
most out of your automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the
à and ¿ buttons light up.
RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).
ROnly use the "windshield defrosting"
function briefly until the windshield is clear
again.
ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in a tunnel. The windows could
otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn
into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the
temperature settings on the driver's side
122 Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
for the front-passenger side as well. The
indicator lamp in the á button goes out.
RUse the residual heat function if you want
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior
when the ignition is switched off. The
residual heat function can only be activated
or deactivated with the ignition switched
off.
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO
start/stop function only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require the full
climate control output, you can switch off the
ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO
button (Y page 138).
Operating the climate control
systems
Switching climate control on/off
Points to observe before use
When the climate control is switched off, the
air supply and air circulation are also
switched off. The windows could fog up.
Therefore, switch off climate control only
briefly
Activating/deactivating
Automatic climate control
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
XTo switch on: turn control A clockwise to
the desired position (except position 0)
(Y page 119).
XTo switch off: turn control A counter-
clockwise to position 0(Y page 119).
Dual-zone automatic climate control
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
X To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
XPress the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored.
XTo deactivate: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
iDual-zone automatic climate control:
switch on climate control primarily using
the à button.
Activating/deactivating cooling with
air dehumidification
Points to observe before use
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-
dehumidification" function, the air inside the
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
only deactivate the "Cooling with air-
dehumidification" function briefly.
The cooling with air dehumidification function
is only available when the engine is running.
The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
dehumidified according to the temperature
selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and not a sign that there is a
malfunction.
Operating the climate control systems 123
Climate control
Activating/deactivating
XTo activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
up.
XTo deactivate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes
out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function has a delayed switch-off feature.
124 Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The indicator lamp in
the ¿ button
flashes three times or
remains off. The
"Cooling with air
dehumidification"
function cannot be
switched on.
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
malfunction.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Setting the climate control to
automatic
The automatic function is only available in
conjunction with dual-zone automatic climate
control.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at a constant level.
The system automatically regulates the
temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow
and the air distribution.
The automatic mode functions optimally
when the "Cooling with air dehumidification"
function is activated. If necessary, cooling
with air dehumidification can be deactivated.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-
dehumidification" function, the air inside the
vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the
vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The
windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,
only deactivate the "Cooling with air-
dehumidification" function briefly.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
XSet the desired temperature.
XTo activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are activated.
XTo switch to manual mode: press the
É or Ë button.
or
XPress the K or I button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are deactivated.
Setting the temperature
Automatic climate control
You can set the temperature for the entire
vehicle.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
XTo increase/reduce: turn control :
clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 119). Only change the temperature
setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡
(22 †).
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Different temperatures can be set for the
driver's and front-passenger sides.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
XTo increase/reduce: turn control : or
E clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 121). Only change the temperature
Operating the climate control systems 125
Climate control
setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡
(22 †).
Setting the air distribution
Automatic climate control
Air distribution settings
¯Directs air through the defroster vents
PDirects air through the center and side
air vents
ODirects air through the footwell air
vents
iYou can also activate several air
distribution settings simultaneously. To do
this, press multiple air distribution buttons.
The air is then directed through various
vents.
Setting the air distribution
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
XPress one or more of the P, O,
¯ buttons.
The corresponding indicator lamp lights up
briefly.
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Air distribution settings
¯Directs air through the defroster vents
PDirects air through the center and side
air vents
ODirects air through the footwell air
vents
bDirects air through the defroster,
center and side air vents
aDirects air through the defroster and
footwell vents
iRegardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side
air vents. The side air vents can only be
closed if the adjusters are turned clockwise
until they engage.
Setting the air distribution
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
XPress the É or Ë button repeatedly
until the desired symbol appears in the
display.
Setting the airflow
Automatic climate control
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
XTo increase/reduce: turn control A
clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 119).
Dual-zone automatic climate control
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
XTo increase/reduce: press the K or
I button.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
This function is only available with dual-zone
automatic climate control.
XTo activate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button lights
up.
The temperature setting for the driver's
side is not adopted for the front-passenger
side.
XTo deactivate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
The temperature setting for the driver's
side is adopted for the front-passenger
side.
126 Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
Defrosting the windshield
You can use this function to defrost the
windshield or to defrost the inside of the
windshield and the side windows.
iYou should only select the "windshield
defrosting" function until the windshield is
clear again.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
XTo activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
Rhigh airflow
Rhigh temperature
Rair distribution to the windshield and
front side windows
Rair-recirculation mode off
iThe "windshield defrosting" function
automatically sets the blower output to the
optimum defrosting effect. As a result, the
airflow may increase or decrease
automatically after the button is pressed.
iYou can adjust the blower output
manually while the "Windshield defrosting"
function is in operation:
RAutomatic climate control: turn airflow
control A clockwise or counter-
clockwise (Y page 119).
RDual-zone automatic climate control:
press the ó or ô button.
XTo deactivate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated.
or
XPress the à button.5
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
XAutomatic climate control: turn
temperature control : clockwise or
counter-clockwise (Y page 119).
Dual-zone automatic climate control:
turn temperature controls : or E
clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 121).
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in
vehicles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the
engine is running.
XTo activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
XTo deactivate: press the Ù button
again.
The indicator lamp goes out. The previously
selected settings are restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate
control switches to the following functions:
Rmaximum cooling
Rmaximum airflow
Rair-recirculation mode on
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
Automatic climate control
XActivate the ¿ "Cooling with air
dehumidification" function.
XIf the windows continue to fog up, activate
the "windshield defrosting" function
(Y page 127).
53-zone automatic climate control only.
Operating the climate control systems 127
Climate control
iYou should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
Dual-zone automatic climate control
XActivate the ¿ "Cooling with air
dehumidification" function.
XActivate automatic mode Ã.
XIf the windows continue to fog up, activate
the "windshield defrosting" function
(Y page 127).
iYou should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside
XActivate the windshield wipers.
XSet the air distribution to P or O.
iYou should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
Rear window defroster
Activating/deactivating
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
the rear window defroster switches off
automatically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
window defroster may switch off.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
XPress the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
128 Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The rear window
defroster has
deactivated
prematurely or cannot
be activated.
The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
XSwitch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
defroster can be activated again.
Activating/deactivating air-
recirculation mode
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the
windows can fog up more quickly, in
particular at low temperatures. Only use air-
recirculation mode briefly to prevent the
windows from fogging up.
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle
from outside. The air already inside the
vehicle will then be recirculated.
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the
same for all control panels.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
XTo activate: press the e button.
The indicator lamp in the e button lights
up.
iAir-recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside
temperatures. When air-recirculation mode
is activated automatically, the indicator
lamp in the e button is not lit.
Outside air is added after about
30 minutes.
XTo deactivate: press the e button.
The indicator lamp in the e button goes
out.
iAir-recirculation mode deactivates
automatically:
Rafter approximately five minutes at
outside temperatures below
approximately 41 ‡ (5 †)
Rafter approximately five minutes if the
"Cooling with air dehumidification"
function is deactivated
Rafter approximately 30 minutes at
outside temperatures above
approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling
with air dehumidification" function is
activated
Activating/deactivating the residual
heat function
The residual heat function is only available in
vehicles for Canada with dual-zone automatic
climate control.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
of the engine to continue heating the vehicle
for approximately 30 minutes after the engine
has been switched off. The heating time
depends on the temperature that has been
set.
iThe blower will run at a low speed
regardless of the airflow setting.
iIf you activate the residual heat function
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
will be activated. The blower runs at
medium speed.
Operating the climate control systems 129
Climate control
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock or remove it (Y page 135).
XTo activate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up.
XTo deactivate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes
out.
iResidual heat is deactivated
automatically:
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rif the battery voltage drops
Rwhen the auxiliary heating is activated
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air
outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield
and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,
snow or leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles
in the vehicle interior.
iYou can move the adjusters for the air
vents vertically or horizontally to set the
direction of the airflow.
iFor optimal climate control in the vehicle,
open the air vents completely and set the
adjusters to the central position.
Setting the center air vents
XTo open the center air vent: turn the
adjuster in one of center air vents :
counter-clockwise.
XTo close the center air vent: turn the
adjuster in one of center air vents :
clockwise until it engages.
Setting the side air vents
:Side window defroster vent
;Side air vent
XTo open a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in side air vent ; counter-clockwise.
XTo close a side air vent: turn the adjuster
in side air vent ; clockwise until it
engages.
130 Setting the air vents
Climate control
Setting the rear-compartment air
vents
:Rear-compartment air vent, left
;Rear-compartment air vent, right
=Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
XTo open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or
down.
Setting the air vents 131
Climate control
Z
132
Useful information ............................ 134
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 134
Driving ............................................... 134
Automatic transmission ................... 140
Refueling ............................................ 147
Parking ............................................... 149
Driving tips ........................................ 152
Driving systems ................................ 157
133
Driving and parking
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Important safety notes
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after
several hundred kilometers of driving.
Compensate for this by applying greater force
to the brake pedal.
The first 1,000miles (1,500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its
performance in the future.
RYou should therefore drive at varying
vehicle and engine speeds for the first
1,000 miles (1,500 km).
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full
throttle, during this period.
RChange gear in good time, before the
tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the
red area of the tachometer.
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to
brake the vehicle.
RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator
pedal past the point of resistance
(kickdown).
RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),
drive in program E.
After 1,000 miles (1,500km), you can
increase the engine speed gradually and bring
the vehicle up to full speed.
iYou should also observe these notes on
breaking-in if the engine or parts of the
drive train on your vehicle have been
replaced.
iAlways observe the respective speed
limits.
Driving
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats.
GWARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
Rshoes with thick soles
Rshoes with high heels
Rslippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
GWARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
134 Driving
Driving and parking
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
GWARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
Roverheat and cause a fire
Rlose its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off.
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
the engine's full performance until it has
reached operating temperature.
Only shift the automatic transmission to
the desired drive position when the vehicle
is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery
roads. You could otherwise damage the
drive train.
Key positions
gTo remove the SmartKey
(shift the transmission to position P)
1Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windshield wipers
2Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3To start the engine
iThe SmartKey can be turned in the
ignition lock even if it is not the correct
SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not
switched on. The engine cannot be started.
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
GWARNING
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
iDuring a cold start, the engine runs at
higher speeds to enable the catalytic
converter to reach its operating
temperature. The sound of the engine may
change during this time.
Automatic transmission
XShift the transmission to position P.
Transmission position display P is shown in
the multifunction display.
iWhen the transmission is in position N,
you can also start the engine with the brake
pedal depressed.
Starting procedure
XTurn the SmartKey to position 3 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135) and release it as
soon as the engine is running.
Driving 135
Driving and parking
Z
Pulling away
Automatic transmission
iIt is only possible to shift the transmission
from position P to the desired position if
you depress the brake pedal. Only then can
the parking lock be deactivated. If you do
not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT
SELECT lever can still be moved but the
parking lock remains engaged.
iIf the transmission oil temperature is
below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 † ), you can only shift from
position P when the engine is running.
XDepress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
XShift the transmission to position D or R.
XRelease the brake pedal.
XCarefully depress the accelerator pedal.
The electric parking brake (Y page 150) is
automatically released.
The red ! indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
iThe vehicle locks centrally once you have
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at
any time.
You can also deactivate the automatic
locking feature (Y page 198).
iUpshifts take place at higher engine
speeds after a cold start. This helps the
catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature more quickly.
Hill start assist
GWARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no
longer brake your vehicle and it could roll
away. There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.
It holds the vehicle for a short time after you
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and to depress it before the vehicle begins to
roll.
XRemove your foot from the brake pedal.
The vehicle is then held for about a second.
XPull away.
Hill start assist will not function if:
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on
a downhill gradient.
Rthe transmission is in position N.
Rthe electric parking brake is applied.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
Further information on holding the vehicle
stationary on uphill gradients (Y page 143).
ECO start/stop function
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically and
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
General notes
If the ¤ symbol is shown in the
multifunction display, the ECO start/stop
function switches the engine off
automatically when the vehicle stops.
The engine starts automatically when the
driver wants to pull away again. The ECO
start/stop function thereby helps you to
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions
of your vehicle.
136 Driving
Driving and parking
The stop/start function is automatically
activated each time you start the engine with
the SmartKey.
If the ECO start/stop function has been
manually deactivated (Y page 138) or a
malfunction has caused the system to be
deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not
displayed.
Automatic engine switch-off
General notes
The ECO start/stop function is operational
and the ¤ symbol is displayed in the
multifunction display, if:
Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green.
Rthe outside temperature is within the
comfort range.
Rthe engine is at normal operating
temperature.
Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.
Rthe system detects that the windshield is
not fogged up when the air-conditioning
system is switched on.
Rthe hood is closed.
Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened.
If conditions for automatic engine switch-off
have not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol will
not be shown.
iAll of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine has been stopped
automatically.
iThe engine can be switched off
automatically a maximum of four times
(first stop and three subsequent stops) in
succession. Automatic engine switch-off is
possible again once the ECO symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or
N, the ECO start/stop function switches off
the engine automatically.
iThe HOLD function can be activated if the
engine has been switched off
automatically. It is then not necessary to
continue applying the brakes during the
automatic stop phase. When you depress
the accelerator pedal, the engine starts
automatically and the braking effect of the
HOLD function is deactivated.
Automatic engine start
General notes
The engine starts automatically if:
Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button.
Ryou engage reverse gear R.
Rthe vehicle starts to roll.
Rthe brake system requires this.
Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior
deviates from the set range.
Rthe system detects moisture on the
windshield when the air-conditioning
system is switched on.
Rthe condition of charge of the battery is too
low.
Rthe driver's seat belt is removed or the
driver's door is opened.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
The engine is started automatically if you:
Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is not
activated and the transmission is in
position D or N.
Rdepress the accelerator pedal.
Rmove the transmission out of position P.
iShifting the transmission to position P
does not start the engine.
iIf you shift the transmission from R to D,
the ECO start/stop function is available
Driving 137
Driving and parking
Z
again as soon as the ¤ symbol
reappears in the multifunction display.
Deactivating/activating the ECO start/
stop function
ECO button
XTo switch off: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; on button : and the
¤ symbol in the multifunction display go
out.
XTo switch on: press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 137) are fulfilled, the
¤ symbol is shown in the multifunction
display.
If not all conditions for automatic engine
switch-off (Y page 137) are fulfilled the
¤ symbol is not shown in the
multifunction display. If this is the case, the
ECO start/stop function is not available.
iIf indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/
stop function has been deactivated
manually or as the result of a malfunction.
The engine will then not be switched off
automatically when the vehicle stops.
138 Driving
Driving and parking
Problems with the engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine does not
start.
The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.
XDeactivate the HOLD function (Y page 167) or DISTRONIC
PLUS (Y page 159).
XTry to start the engine again.
The engine does not
start. The starter motor
can be heard.
RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
XTurn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before
attempting to start the engine again.
XTry to start the engine again (Y page 135). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
or discharged.
XJump-start the vehicle (Y page 289).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
XAllow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
XTry to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving 139
Driving and parking
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine is not
running smoothly and
is misfiring.
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
component of the engine management system.
XOnly depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
XHave the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter and damage it.
The coolant
temperature display is
showing more than
248 ‡ (120 †). The
coolant warning lamp
may also be lit and a
warning tone may
sound.
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
XStop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
to cool down.
XCheck the coolant level (Y page 269). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or
R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There
is a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
GWARNING
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake.
DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positions
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
jPark position with parking lock
kReverse gear
iNeutral
hDrive
iThe DIRECT SELECT lever always returns
to its original position. The current
transmission position P, R, N or D appears
in the transmission position display
(Y page 141) in the multifunction display.
140 Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Transmission position and drive
program display
The current transmission position and drive
program appear in the multifunction display.
:Transmission position display
;Drive program display
iThe arrows in the transmission position
display show how and into which
transmission positions you can change
using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
! If the transmission position display in the
multifunction display is not working, you
should pull away carefully to check whether
the desired transmission position is
engaged. Ideally, you should select
transmission position D and drive program
E or S.
Engaging park position P
XPush the DIRECT SELECT lever in the
direction of arrow P.
Transmission position display P is shown in
the multifunction display.
iWhen you engage park position P, make
sure that the transmission position display
shows P in the multifunction display.
iYou can only engage park position P when
the vehicle is stationary.
iThe automatic transmission shifts into
park position P automatically:
Rif you open the driver's door while the
vehicle is stationary in transmission
position D or R
Rif you open the door while traveling at
very low speeds in transmission position
D or R
In addition, a warning tone sounds and a
display message is shown.
iDepressing the brake and pushing the
DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
disengages the parking lock. The
transmission is in N neutral.
At transmission fluid temperatures below
Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †), you can only shift out of park
position P into another transmission
position when the engine is running.
In order to shift from park position P
directly into R or D:
Rdepress the brake pedal and
Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or
down past the first point of resistance
! If the engine speed is too high or the
vehicle is moving, do not shift the
automatic transmission directly from D to
R, from R to D or directly to P. The
automatic transmission could otherwise be
damaged.
Engaging reverse gear R
! Only shift the automatic transmission to
R when the vehicle is stationary.
iThe ECO start/stop function is not
available when reverse gear is engaged.
Further information on the ECO start/stop
function (Y page 136).
XWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
XPush the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
first point of resistance.
Shifting to neutral N
XWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
XPush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance.
If the engine has been switched off, the
automatic transmission automatically shifts
to N.
Automatic transmission 141
Driving and parking
Z
Remaining in neutral N
If the automatic transmission is to remain in
neutral N, e.g. for washing the vehicle in car
washes with a towing device, please observe
the following instructions:
GWARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
Ropen the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
Rget out and disrupt traffic.
Roperate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
Rrelease the parking brake.
Rshift the automatic transmission out of
parking position P.
Rstarting the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
RMake sure that the ignition is switched on.
RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
RShift to neutral N.
RRelease the brake pedal.
RIf the electric parking brake is engaged,
release it.
RSwitch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Engaging drive position D
XWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal.
XPush the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
the first point of resistance.
Transmission positions
BPark position
Do not shift the transmission into
position P unless the vehicle is
stationary (Y page 149). The
parking lock should not be used as
a brake when parking. Always
apply the electronic parking brake
in addition to the parking lock in
order to secure the vehicle.
If the vehicle electronics are
malfunctioning, the transmission
may be locked in position P.
Have the vehicle electronics
checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
CReverse gear
Only shift the transmission to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
ANeutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to
push it or tow it.
If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:
only shift the transmission to
position N if the vehicle is in danger
of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
When you switch off the engine, the
automatic transmission
automatically shifts into neutral N.
7Drive
The automatic transmission
changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
142 Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the
individual gears automatically when it is in
transmission position D. This automatic
gearshifting behavior is determined by:
Rthe selected drive program (Y page 143)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Driving tips
Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients
GWARNING
If the clutch overheats, the electronic
management system is automatically
deactivated. This interrupts the power
transmission. The vehicle may, for example,
roll backwards on gradients. There is a risk of
an accident.
Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients by depressing the accelerator.
The clutch may overheat if you hold the
vehicle stationary on uphill gradients by
depressing the accelerator pedal. If the clutch
overheats, a warning tone sounds. The Stop
Vehicle Shift to P Leave Engine
Running display message appears in the
multifunction display. You will only be able to
continue your journey once the clutch has
cooled down and the display message in the
multifunction display has disappeared.
Never hold the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients by depressing the accelerator.
Instead, only ever hold the vehicle stationary
on uphill gradients by:
Rdepressing the brake pedal
Ractivating the HOLD function
Rengaging the electric parking brake
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
XDepress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a
lower gear depending on the engine speed.
XEase off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Rocking the vehicle free
Shifting the transmission repeatedly between
gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if
it has become stuck in slush or snow. The
vehicle's engine management system limits
the speed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h)
when shifting back and forth. To shift back
and forth between transmission positions D
and R, move the selector lever up and down
beyond the pressure point.
Program selector button
General notes
The program selector button allows you to
choose between drive programs with
different driving characteristics.
Example: program selector button
Automatic transmission 143
Driving and parking
Z
E Economy Comfortable, economical
driving
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Manual gear shifting
Only change from automatic drive program
E or S to manual drive program M when the
vehicle is stationary.
XPress program selector button :
repeatedly until the letter for the desired
gearshift program appears in the
multifunction display.
iThe automatic transmission shifts to
automatic drive program E each time the
engine is started.
iFor further information on the automatic
drive program, see (Y page 144).
Steering wheel paddle shifters
:Left steering wheel paddle shifter (shifts
down)
;Right steering wheel paddle shifter (shifts
up)
In drive program M, you can change gear
yourself using the steering wheel paddle
shifters.
If you pull the left or right steering wheel
paddle shifter when in automatic drive
program E or S, the automatic transmission
shifts into drive program M for a limited time.
Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled,
the automatic transmission immediately
shifts into the next gear down or up.
iYou can only change gear with the
steering wheel paddle shifters when the
transmission is in position D.
iFor further information on the manual
drive program, see (Y page 144).
Automatic drive program
Drive program E is characterized by the
following:
Rcomfort-oriented engine settings
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the
accelerator pedal is depressed fully
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
stability on slippery road surfaces, for
example
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
driven at lower engine speeds and the
wheels being less likely to spin
Drive program S is characterized by the
following:
Rsporty engine settings
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
later
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher
as a result of the later automatic
transmission shift points
Manual drive program
Introduction
In manual drive program M, you can change
gear yourself by using the steering wheel
paddle shifters. For this, the transmission
must be in position D. The gear currently
144 Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
selected and engaged is shown in the
multifunction display.
Manual drive program M differs from drive
programs E and S with regard to spontaneity,
responsiveness and smoothness of gear
changes.
Gear Driving situations
=You can use the engine's braking
effect
5To use the braking effect of the
engine on downhill gradients and
for driving:
Ron steep mountain roads
Rin mountainous terrain
Rin arduous conditions
4To use the braking effect of the
engine on extremely steep downhill
gradients and on long downhill
stretches
Switching on the manual drive program
Activating permanently
XPress the program selector button
(Y page 143) repeatedly until M appears in
the multifunction display.
Manual drive program M remains active
until drive program E or S is engaged.
Activating temporarily
XPull the right or left steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 144).
M is shown in the multifunction display.
Manual drive program M is temporarily
active. Depending on which paddle shifter
is pulled, the automatic transmission
immediately shifts into the next gear down
or up.
iWhen manual drive program M is
activated via the steering wheel paddle
shifters, the temporarily active manual
drive program M will be deactivated
automatically after a limited time, if the
driving situation permits. In this case, the
automatic transmission shifts into the
automatic drive program that was last
engaged, i.e. E or S. When driving on
downhill gradients, the temporarily active
manual drive program M will only be
deactivated if the accelerator pedal is
depressed while the vehicle is rolling
downhill.
Upshifting
XPull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 144).
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
XShift up a gear when the ^ upshift symbol
appears in the display instead of M.
iTo prevent engine damage the automatic
transmission shifts up automatically:
Rif the maximum engine speed on the
currently engaged gear is reached and
Ryou continue to accelerate.
Downshifting
XPull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter (Y page 144).
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
iIf you slow down or stop without shifting
down, the automatic transmission
automatically shifts down.
iFor maximum acceleration, pull the left-
hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the
transmission selects the optimum gear for
the current speed.
iIf the engine exceeds the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the
automatic transmission protects against
engine damage by not shifting down.
Automatic transmission 145
Driving and parking
Z
Kickdown
You can also use kickdown for maximum
acceleration in manual drive program M.
XDepress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on the engine speed.
XShift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
iDuring kickdown, you cannot change gear
using the steering wheel paddle shifters.
iIf you apply full throttle, the automatic
transmission shifts up to the next gear
when the maximum engine speed is
reached. This prevents the engine from
overrevving.
Switching off the manual drive program
XPress the program selector button
(Y page 143) repeatedly until E or S
appears in the multifunction display.
Deactivating the temporary manual drive
program
XPull and hold the right-hand steering wheel
paddle shifter until the automatic
transmission shifts into the last active
automatic drive program: E or S.
iIf manual drive program M is deactivated,
the automatic transmission in automatic
drive program E or S may shift from the
current gear into a higher or lower gear.
This is dependent on the position of the
accelerator pedal, speed and load.
146 Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Problems with the transmission
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The transmission has
problems shifting gear.
The transmission is losing oil.
XHave the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
The acceleration ability
is deteriorating.
The transmission no
longer shifts into all of
the gears.
Reverse gear can no
longer be engaged.
The transmission is in emergency mode.
XStop the vehicle.
XShift the transmission to position P.
XSwitch off the engine.
XWait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
XShift the transmission to position D.
XHave the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Refueling
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
GWARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance
without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical
assistance without delay. Do not induce
vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
GWARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the
ignition if you accidentally refuel with the
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. The repair
costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist
workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel
lines drained completely.
Refueling 147
Driving and parking
Z
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection
system could be blocked by particles from
the fuel can.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(Y page 330).
Refueling
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
:To open the fuel filler flap
;Tire pressure table
=To insert the fuel filler cap
?Fuel type to be used
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked
automatically when you open or close the
vehicle with the SmartKey.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
æ in the instrument cluster. The arrow on
the filling pump indicates the side of the
vehicle.
Opening
XSwitch the engine off.
XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
XPress the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
XTurn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
XInsert the fuel filler cap into holder on the
inside of fuel filler flap =.
XCompletely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place
and refuel.
XOnly fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
iDo not add any more fuel after the pump
stops filling for the first time. Otherwise,
fuel may leak out.
Closing
XReplace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
XClose the fuel filler flap.
iClose the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle.
iIf you are driving with the fuel filler cap
open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp
flashes. A message appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 214).
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
lamp may light up (Y page 231).
For further information on warning and
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
see (Y page 231).
148 Refueling
Driving and parking
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
GWARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock immediately
and remove it (Y page 135).
XDo not restart the engine under any circumstances.
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap
cannot be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
or
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
XUnlock the vehicle (Y page 68).
or
XUnlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 69).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is
jammed.
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If flammable materials such as leaves, grass
or twigs are exposed to prolonged contact to
parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they
could ignite. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable
materials come into contact with parts of the
vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not
to park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
GWARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
example:
Rreleasing the parking brake
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
the parking position P
Rstarting the engine.
They could also operate the vehicle's
equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
! Always secure the vehicle correctly
against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle
or its drivetrain could be damaged.
Parking 149
Driving and parking
Z
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.
Rthe transmission must be in position P and
the transmission position display must
show P.
Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the
ignition lock.
Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the front
wheels must be turned towards the curb.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
GWARNING
The automatic transmission switches to
neutral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a
risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
XApply the electric parking brake.
XShift the transmission to position P.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
iIf you switch the engine off with the
transmission in position R or D, the
automatic transmission shifts to N
automatically.
If you then open one of the front doors or
remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the
automatic transmission shifts to P.
If you shift the automatic transmission to
N before switching off the engine, the
automatic transmission remains in N even
if a door is opened.
iThe automatic transmission shifts to P
automatically if you:
Rswitch off the engine using the SmartKey
and remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock or
Rswitch off the engine using the SmartKey
and open a front door.
If you attempt to turn off the engine when the
selector lever is not in position P:
Ra message appears in the multifunction
display
Ra warning signal sounds
Electric parking brake
General notes
GWARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for
example:
Rreleasing the parking brake
Rshifting the automatic transmission out of
the parking position P
Rstarting the engine.
They could also operate the vehicle's
equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
iThe electric parking brake performs a
function test at regular intervals while the
150 Parking
Driving and parking
engine is switched off. The sounds that can
be heard while this is occurring are normal.
Applying/releasing manually
Applying
XPush handle :.
When the electric parking brake is
engaged, the ! red indicator lamp lights
up in the instrument cluster.
iThe electric parking brake can also be
applied when the SmartKey is removed.
Releasing
XPull handle :.
The red ! indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
iYou can only release the electric parking
brake when the key is in position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
Applying automatically
The electric parking brake is applied
automatically:
Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a
standstill or
Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle
stationary
In addition, at least one of the following
conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe engine is switched off.
Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt
is not fastened.
Rthere is a system malfunction.
Rthe power supply is insufficient.
Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
period.
The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
iThe electric parking brake is not
automatically engaged if the engine is
switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
Releasing automatically
Your vehicle's electric parking brake is
automatically released if all of the following
conditions are met:
Rthe engine is running.
Rthe transmission is in position D or R.
Rthe seat belt has been fastened.
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.
If the transmission is in position R, the tailgate
must be closed.
If your seat belt is not fastened, the following
conditions must be fulfilled to automatically
release the electric parking brake:
Rthe driver's door is closed.
Ryou have shifted out of transmission
position P or you have previously driven
faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Emergency braking
The vehicle can also be braked during an
emergency by using the electric parking
brake.
XWhile driving, push handle : of the electric
parking brake (Y page 150).
iThe vehicle is braked for as long as
handle : of the electric parking brake is
pressed. The longer electric parking brake
handle : is depressed, the greater the
braking force.
During braking:
Ra warning tone sounds
Rthe Release Park. Brake message
appears
Rthe red ! indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster flashes
When the vehicle has been braked to a
standstill, the electric parking brake is
engaged.
Parking 151
Driving and parking
Z
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as
a result of lack of use.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop and
seek advice.
iYou can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist
workshop.
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
GWARNING
If you operate mobile communication
equipment while driving, you will be
distracted from traffic conditions. You could
also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk
of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are driving. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers
a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
per second.
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
RThe tires should always be inflated to the
recommended tire pressure.
RRemove unnecessary loads.
RRemove roof racks when they are not
needed.
RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.
RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.
RHave all maintenance work carried out as
indicated by the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or by the service
interval display.
Fuel consumption also increases when
driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic
and in hilly terrain.
Drinking and driving
GWARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and
judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Emission control
GWARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
152 Driving tips
Driving and parking
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications. For this
reason, only have work on the engine carried
out by qualified and authorized Mercedes-
Benz technicians.
The engine settings must not be changed
under any circumstances. Furthermore, all
specific service work must be carried out at
regular intervals and in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
ECO display
The ECO display gives you information on how
economical your driving style is. The ECO
display assists you in achieving the optimum
driving style in terms of consumption, taking
the actual and selected conditions into
consideration. Your driving style can
significantly influence the vehicle's
consumption.
Example: ECO display
The ECO display consists of three bars:
RAcceleration
RConstant
RCoasting
The percent value is the average value of the
three bars. The three bars and the mean value
begin at the value of 50%. A higher
percentage indicates a more economical
driving style.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual
fuel consumption and a fixed percentage
count in the ECO display does not indicate a
fixed consumption figure.
Apart from driving style, consumption is
dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:
RLoad
RTire pressure
RCold start
RChoice of route
RElectrical consumers switched on
These factors are not taken into
consideration by the ECO display.
The evaluation of your driving style is carried
out using the following three categories:
RAcceleration (evaluation of all
acceleration processes)
-The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
especially at higher speeds
-The bar empties: sporty acceleration
RConstant (assessment of driving behavior
at all times)
-The bar fills up: constant speed and
avoidance of unnecessary acceleration
and deceleration
-The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration
processes)
-The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,
keeping your distance and early release
of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast
without use of the brakes.
-The bar empties: frequent braking
iAn economical driving style specially
requires driving at moderate engine
speeds.
To achieve a higher value in the categories
Acceleration and Constant:
Robserve the gearshift recommendations.
Rdrive in drive program E.
Driving tips 153
Driving and parking
Z
iOn long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.
on the highway, only the bar for Constant
will change.
iThe ECO display summaries the driving
characteristics from the start of the journey
to its completion. For this reason, the bars
change dynamically at the beginning of the
journey. On longer journeys, there are
fewer changes. For more dynamic changes,
carry out a manual reset.
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 190).
Brakes
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
! On long and steep gradients, you must
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to
a lower gear in good time. This allows you
to take advantage of the engine's braking
effect. For this, you need to have selected
manual drive program M. This helps you to
avoid overheating the brakes and wearing
them out excessively.
When you take advantage of the engine's
braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn
for some time, e.g. on a slippery road
surface. This could cause damage to the
drive train. This type of damage is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
iBriefly depressing the accelerator pedal
on downhill gradients while the manual
drive program M is temporarily activated:
the automatic transmission may switch to
the last active automatic drive program E
or S. The automatic transmission may shift
to a higher gear. This can reduce the
engine's braking effect.
Heavy and light loads
GWARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately.
Drive on for a short while. This allows the
airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed
reaction from the brakes when braking for the
first time. This may also occur after the
vehicle has been washed or driven through
deep water.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the
vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying
attention to the traffic conditions. This will
warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them
more quickly and protecting them against
corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt
residue may form on the brake discs and
154 Driving tips
Driving and parking
brake pads. This can result in a significantly
longer braking distance.
RBrake occasionally to remove any possible
salt residue. Make sure that you do not
endanger other road users when doing so.
RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the
beginning and end of a journey.
RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Servicing the brakes
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and you hear a
warning tone while the engine is running,
the brake fluid level may be too low.
Observe additional warning messages in
the multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked
immediately. This work should be carried
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
! A function or performance test should
only be carried out on a 2-axle
dynamometer. If you are planning to have
the vehicle tested on such a dynamometer,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to obtain further information first.
Otherwise, you could damage the drive
train or the brake system.
! As the ESP® system operates
automatically, the engine and the ignition
must be switched off (the SmartKey must
be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if:
Rthe electric parking brake is tested on a
brake dynamometer (for a maximum of
ten seconds)
Rthe vehicle is towed with the front axle
raised.
Braking triggered automatically by ESP®
may seriously damage the brake system.
All checks and maintenance work on the
brake system must be carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop. Consult a
qualified specialist workshop to arrange this.
Have brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the
functionality of your brakes at regular
intervals.
You can find a description of Brake Assist
(BAS) on (Y page 59).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
have brake pads/linings installed on your
vehicle which have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond
to an equivalent quality standard. Brake
pads/linings which have not been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not
of an equivalent quality could affect your
vehicle's operating safety.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use brake fluid that has been specially
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,
or which corresponds to an equivalent quality
standard. Brake fluid which has not been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
which is not of an equivalent quality could
affect your vehicle's operating safety.
Checking brake lining thickness
You can measure the break pad/lining
thickness using a test gauge. Color-coding
(green or red) on the test gauge allows you to
determine whether the brake pad/lining
thickness is still sufficient. The test gauge is
in the vehicle document wallet in the glove
box.
Driving tips 155
Driving and parking
Z
Front wheel
Rear wheel
XBring the vehicle and wheels into a suitable
position so that you can attach test gauge
A.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 149).
XMove the selector lever to position P.
XSwitch off the engine.
XPlace test gauge A between the wheel's
spokes on brake pad/lining =.
XHold test gauge A vertically on brake
disc : and slide measuring pin ; onto
brake disc :.
XCheck which color field ? the arrow on
measuring pin ; is pointing to.
Green: the brake pad/lining thickness is
sufficient.
Red: the brake pad/lining thickness is not
sufficient. Have the brake pads/lining
checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
iTo avoid an inaccurate measurement:
Rmake sure you position the wheels
suitably
Rdo not put the measuring pin on a recess
in the brake disc
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth
on the road surface, there is a danger of
hydroplaning occurring, even if:
Ryou drive at low speeds.
Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or
in conditions in which hydroplaning may
occur, you must drive in the following
manner:
Rlower your speed.
Ravoid ruts.
Rbrake carefully.
Driving on flooded roads
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Check the depth of any water before driving
through it. Drive slowly through standing
water. Otherwise, water may enter the
vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
This can damage the electronic
components in the engine or the automatic
transmission. Water can also be drawn in
by the engine's air suction nozzles and this
can cause engine damage.
156 Driving tips
Driving and parking
Winter driving
General notes
GWARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface.
GDANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open
a window on the side of the vehicle that is not
facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (Y page 300).
Driving with summer tires
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (Y page 300).
Slippery road surfaces
GWARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
XShift the transmission to position N.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise
control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are
displayed after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You
should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around
freezing point.
iFor more information on driving with
snow chains, see (Y page 301).
Driving systems
Cruise control
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
control can neither reduce the risk of an
accident nor override the laws of physics.
Cruise control cannot take into account the
road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise
control is only an aid. You are responsible for
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for
staying in your lane.
Do not use cruise control:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
accelerating could cause the drive wheels
Driving systems 157
Driving and parking
Z
to lose traction and the vehicle could then
skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the
vehicle is laden, you must select a low gear in
good time. For this, you will need to have
selected manual drive program
M(Y page 144). By doing so, you will make
use of the braking effect of the engine, This
relieves the load on the brake system and
prevents the brakes from overheating and
wearing too quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic
conditions make it appropriate to maintain a
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Cruise control lever
:To activate or increase speed
;To activate or reduce speed
=To deactivate cruise control
?To activate at the current speed/last
stored speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display
for five seconds.
Activation conditions
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
Rthe electric parking brake must be
released.
Ryou are driving faster than
20 mph(30 km/h).
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
the selector lever must be in position D.
Storing, maintaining and calling up a
speed
Storing and maintaining the current
speed
You can store the current speed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30km/h).
XAccelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
XBriefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ;.
XRemove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
automatically maintains the stored speed.
iCruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by
automatically applying the brakes.
Storing the current speed or calling up the
last stored speed
GWARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle
accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know
the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
158 Driving systems
Driving and parking
or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an
accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic
conditions before calling up the stored speed.
If you do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
XBriefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ?.
XRemove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously
stored speed.
Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
XPress the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
XTo adjust the set speed in 1 mph
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
XTo adjust the set speed in 5 mph
increments (10 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
iCruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For
example, if you accelerate briefly to
overtake, cruise control adjusts the
vehicle's speed to the last speed stored
after you have finished overtaking.
Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruise
control:
XBriefly press the cruise control lever
forwards =.
or
XBrake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou engage the electric parking brake.
Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.
Ryou shift the transmission to position N
while driving.
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear
a warning tone. You will see the Cruise
Control Off message in the multifunction
display for approximately five seconds.
iWhen you switch off the engine, the last
speed stored is cleared.
DISTRONIC PLUS
Important safety notes
GWARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
Rpeople or animals
Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g.
stopped or parked vehicles
Roncoming and crossing traffic
As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
warnings nor intervene in such situations.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
GWARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly
identify other road users and complex traffic
situations.
Driving systems 159
Driving and parking
Z
In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
Rgive an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
Rneither give a warning nor intervene
Raccelerate unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, in particular when warned to do so by
DISTRONIC PLUS.
GWARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this
braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS
warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk
of an accident.
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
try to take evasive action.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes
automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
If you fail to adapt your driving style,
DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk
of accident nor override the laws of physics.
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions.
DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or
accelerating could cause the drive wheels
to lose traction and the vehicle could then
skid
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or
vehicles driving on a different line.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain
Rinterference by other radar sources
Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in
parking garages
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a
vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may
unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the
stored speed.
This speed may:
Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane
or an exit lane
Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand
lane that you overtake vehicles in the left-
hand lane
Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane
that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand
lane
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
General notes
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
automatically helps you maintain the
distance to the vehicle detected in front.
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so
that the set speed is not exceeded.
On long and steep downhill gradients,
especially if the vehicle is laden, you must
select a low gear in good time. For this, you
will need to have selected manual drive
program M(Y page 154). By doing so, you will
make use of the braking effect of the engine.
This relieves the load on the brake system and
160 Driving systems
Driving and parking
prevents the brakes from overheating and
wearing too quickly.
If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front,
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle. It
maintains the preset distance to the vehicle
in front.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk
of a collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot
prevent a collision without your intervention.
An intermittent warning tone will then sound
and the distance warning lamp will light up in
the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in
order to increase the distance to the vehicle
in front or take evasive action provided it is
safe to do so.
For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you when
driving, the radar sensor system must be:
Ractivated (Y page 199)
Roperational
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically
deactivated if:
Ryou are driving slower than 15 mph
(25 km/h) and there is no longer a vehicle
in front or
Rthe vehicle in front is no longer detected
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control in the speed range between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). If a
vehicle is driving in front of you, it operates in
the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and
120 mph (200 km/h).
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on
roads with steep gradients.
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,
it can resemble the radar detectors of the
responsible authorities. You can refer to the
relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if
questions are asked about this.
iThis device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Cruise control lever
:To store the current speed or a higher
speed
;To store the current speed or a lower
speed
=To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
?To store the current speed or calling up
the last stored speed
ATo set the specified minimum distance
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS; storing,
maintaining and calling up a speed
Activation conditions
To activate DISTRONIC PLUS, all of the
following activation conditions must be
fulfilled:
Rthe engine must be started. It may take up
to two minutes after pulling away before
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
Rthe electric parking brake must be
released.
RESP® must be active, but not intervening.
Driving systems 161
Driving and parking
Z
Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
fastened.
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors
must be closed.
Rthe vehicle must not skid.
Activating
To activate while driving: when driving at
speeds below 14 mph (20 km/h), you can
only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle
in front has been detected and is shown in the
multifunction display. If the vehicle in front is
no longer detected and displayed,
DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and a tone
sounds.
XBriefly pull the cruise control level towards
you ?, or press it up : or down ;.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
XPress the cruise control lever repeatedly
up : or down ; until the desired speed
is set.
XRemove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
iIf you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive
message appears in the multifunction
display. The set distance to a slower-
moving vehicle in front will then not be
maintained. You will be driving at the speed
you determine by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
To activate when driving towards a
stationary vehicle: if the vehicle in front is
stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC
PLUS if your vehicle is also stationary.
XBriefly pull the cruise control level towards
you ?, or press it up : or down ;.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
iDISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at
under 14 mph (20 km/h) if a vehicle in front
has been detected. It is therefore helpful to
have the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display
activated in the multifunction display
(Y page 194).
XPress the cruise control lever repeatedly
up : or down ; until the desired speed
is set.
iYou can use the cruise control lever to set
the stored speed and the control on the
cruise control lever to set the specified
minimum distance (Y page 165).
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speedometer
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
two segments ; in the set speed range light
up.
iFor design reasons, the speed displayed
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
front : and stored speed = light up.
162 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Distance display with DISTRONIC PLUS activated
in the multifunction display
:DISTRONIC PLUS activated
;Own vehicle
=Specified minimum distance to the
vehicle in front; adjustable
?Vehicle in front, if detected
In the Assistance menu (Y page 194) of the
on-board computer, you can select the
distance display.
XSelect the Distance Display function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 194).
iYou will see the stored speed for about
five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC
PLUS.
Driving
If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is
deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.
Pulling away
XIf the vehicle in front pulls away: remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
XBriefly pull the cruise control lever
(Y page 161) towards you.
or
XAccelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its
speed to that of the vehicle in front.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise
control.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front has slowed down, it brakes your
vehicle. In this way, the distance you have
selected is maintained.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk
of a collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot
prevent a collision without your intervention.
An intermittent warning tone will then sound
and the distance warning lamp will light up in
the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in
order to increase the distance from the
vehicle in front, or take evasive action,
provided it is safe to do so.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front is driving faster, it accelerates your
vehicle, but only up to the speed you have
stored.
Changing lanes
If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
PLUS supports you when:
Ryou are driving faster than 40mph
(60 km/h)
RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the
distance to a vehicle in front
Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal
RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger
of collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle
is accelerated. Acceleration will be
interrupted if changing lanes takes too long
or if the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front becomes too small.
iWhen changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
monitors the left lane on left-hand drive
vehicles and the right lane on right-hand
drive vehicles.
Stopping
GWARNING
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a
Driving systems 163
Driving and parking
Z
vehicle occupant or from outside the
vehicle.
Rthe electrical system in the engine
compartment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 165).
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle
in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until
it is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
stationary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
iAfter a time, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.
iDepending on the specified minimum
distance, your vehicle will come to a
standstill at a sufficient distance behind the
vehicle in front. The specified minimum
distance is set using the control on the
cruise control lever.
The electric parking brake automatically
secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is
activated and:
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
automatically switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission
may be shifted into position P automatically.
Storing the current speed or calling up the
last stored speed
GWARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle
accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know
the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an
accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic
conditions before calling up the stored speed.
If you do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
XBriefly pull the cruise control lever
(Y page 161) towards you.
XRemove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
time it is activated, the current speed is
stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
speed to the previously stored value.
Setting a speed
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
:To store the current speed or a higher
speed
;To store the current speed or a lower
speed
164 Driving systems
Driving and parking
XPress the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
XTo adjust the set speed in 1 mph
increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : or
down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ; the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
XTo adjust the set speed in 5 mph
increments (10 km/h increments):
briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ; to the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up : or down ;, the last speed
stored is increased or reduced.
iDISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. If you
accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS
adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished
overtaking.
Setting the specified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this
function, you can set the minimum distance
that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in
front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 163).
iMake sure that you maintain the
minimum distance to the vehicle in front as
required by law. Adjust the distance to the
vehicle in front if necessary.
XTo increase: turn control = in
direction ;.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
XTo decrease: turn control = in
direction :.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
There are several ways to deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS:
XBriefly press the cruise control lever
forwards :.
or
XBrake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you
will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message
in the multifunction display for approximately
five seconds.
Driving systems 165
Driving and parking
Z
iThe last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically
deactivated if:
Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if
the vehicle is automatically secured with
the electric parking brake
Ryou are driving slower than 7 mph
(10km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,
or if the vehicle in front is no longer
detected
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position
Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
you in order to pull away and the front-
passenger door or one of the rear doors is
open
Rthe vehicle has skidded
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will
hear a warning tone. You will see the
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the
multifunction display for approximately five
seconds.
In the Assistance menu (Y page 194) of the
on-board computer, you can select the
distance display.
Distance display when DISTRONIC PLUS is
deactivated
:Vehicle in front, if detected
;Distance indicator, current distance to
the vehicle in front
=Specified minimum distance to the
vehicle in front; adjustable
?Own vehicle
XSelect the Distance Display function
using the on-board computer
(Y page 194).
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
The following contains descriptions of certain
road and traffic conditions in which you must
be particularly attentive. In such situations,
brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then
deactivated.
Cornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect
vehicles when cornering is limited. Your
vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles traveling on a different line
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles
traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
166 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Other vehicles changing lanes
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the
vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this
vehicle will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the
vehicle in front on the edge of the road,
because of its narrow width. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for
obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for
example, the detected vehicle turns a corner
and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,
DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that
are crossing your lane by mistake. Activating
DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with
crossing traffic, for example, could cause
your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
HOLD function
Important safety notes
GWARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
Rthe electrical system in the engine
compartment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
Driving systems 167
Driving and parking
Z
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes
automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 168).
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep
slopes
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
Rwhen waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if:
Rthe vehicle is stationary
Rthe engine is running or if it has been
automatically switched off by the ECO
start/stop function
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt
is fastened
Rthe electric parking brake is released
Rthe transmission position D, R or N is
engaged while driving a vehicle with an
automatic transmission
RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
Activating the HOLD function
XMake sure that the activation conditions
are met.
XDepress the brake pedal.
XQuickly depress the brake pedal further
until : appears in the multifunction
display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
iIf depressing the brake pedal the first
time does not activate the HOLD function,
wait briefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated
automatically if:
Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic
transmission: only when the transmission
is in position D or R.
Rthe transmission is in position P on vehicles
with automatic transmission.
Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a
certain amount of pressure until :
disappears from the multifunction display.
Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric
parking brake.
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
iAfter a time, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.
168 Driving systems
Driving and parking
The electronic parking brake secures the
vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is
activated and:
Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
seat belt is unfastened.
Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is
automatically switched off by the ECO
start/stop function.
Ra system malfunction occurs.
Rthe power supply is not sufficient.
If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission
may be shifted into position P automatically.
PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
and exiting a parking space. When
maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a
parking space, make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the area in
which you are maneuvering.
! When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such
as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
audibly the distance between your vehicle
and an object.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
you:
Rswitch on the ignition
Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
Rrelease the electric parking brake
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
and four sensors in the rear bumper.
Range of the sensors
General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into
consideration that are:
Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people,
animals or objects
Rabove the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, truck overhangs or
loading ramps.
:Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
side (example)
Side view
Driving systems 169
Driving and parking
Z
Top view
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
slush. They can otherwise not function
correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them
(Y page 275).
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40in (approx.
100cm)
Corners Approx. 24in (approx.
60cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
Corners Approx. 32in (approx.
80cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)
Corners Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the
relevant warning displays light up and a
warning tone sounds. If the distance falls
below the minimum, the distance may no
longer be shown.
Warning displays
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
on the dashboard above the center air vents.
The warning display for the rear area is
located on the headliner in the rear
compartment.
Warning display for the front area
:Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
;Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
=Segments showing operational readiness
The warning display for each side of the
vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red
segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if
yellow segments showing operational
readiness = light up.
The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling
determine which warning display is active
when the engine is running.
Transmission
position
Warning display
DFront area activated
R, N or the vehicle
is rolling
backwards
Rear and front areas
activated
PNo areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
170 Driving systems
Driving and parking
From the:
Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an
intermittent warning tone for
approximately two seconds.
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two
seconds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
:Indicator lamp
;To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is
deactivated.
iPARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the SmartKey to position 2
in the ignition lock.
Driving systems 171
Driving and parking
Z
Problems with PARKTRONIC
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only the red segments
in the PARKTRONIC
warning displays are lit.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
approximately
20 seconds, and the
indicator lamp in the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
XIf problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Only the red segments
in the PARKTRONIC
warning displays are lit.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
approximately
20seconds.
The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
XClean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 275).
XSwitch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
ultrasound waves.
XSee if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist
Important safety notes
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking
and exiting a parking space. When
maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a
parking space, make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the area in
which you are maneuvering.
GWARNING
The vehicle swings out when parking and in
doing so could cross into the opposite lane.
This could result in a collision with another
road user. There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users when
parking. Stop the vehicle if necessary or
cancel the Active Parking Assist parking
procedure.
! If unavoidable, you should drive over
obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at
a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
the wheels or tires.
Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
parking spaces which are not suitable for
parking, for example:
Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited
Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits
Ron unsuitable surfaces
Parking tips:
ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the
parking space as possible.
RParking spaces that are littered, overgrown
or partially occupied by trailer drawbars
might be identified incorrectly or not at all.
172 Driving systems
Driving and parking
RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately.
RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC
(Y page 170) warning messages during the
parking procedure.
RYou can intervene in the steering procedure
to correct it at any time. Active Parking
Assist will then be canceled.
RWhen transporting a load which protrudes
from your vehicle, you should not use
Active Parking Assist.
RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are installed.
RMake sure that the tire pressures are
always correct. This has a direct influence
on the parking characteristics of the
vehicle.
General notes
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to
measure the road on both sides of the vehicle.
A suitable parking space is indicated by the
parking symbol. Active steering intervention
can assist you during parking.
You may also use PARKTRONIC
(Y page 169). When PARKTRONIC is switched
off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable.
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.
not on the pavement
Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the height range of
Active Parking Assist will not be detected
when the parking space is measured. These
are not taken into account when the parking
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods
vehicles. In some circumstances, Active
Parking Assist may therefore guide you into
the parking space too early.
GWARNING
If there are objects above the detection range,
Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely.
You may cause a collision as a result. There is
a risk of an accident.
If there are objects above the detection range,
stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.
Active Parking Assist is automatically
activated when driving forwards. The system
is operational at speeds of up to
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in
operation, the system independently locates
and measures parking spaces on both sides
of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below
19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parking
symbol as a status indicator in the instrument
cluster. By default, Active Parking Assist only
displays parking spaces on the front-
passenger side. Parking spaces on the
driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn
signal on the driver's side is activated. To park
on the driver's side, you must leave the
driver's side turn signal switched on. This
must remain switched on until you
acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist
by pressing the a button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
When a parking space has been detected, an
arrow towards the right or the left also
appears.
Example: detected parking space for a vehicle with
automatic transmission
:Detected parking space on the left
;Parking symbol
=Detected parking space on the right
Driving systems 173
Driving and parking
Z
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
spaces:
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
Rthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than
your vehicle
A parking space is displayed while you are
driving past it, and until you are
approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.
Parking
GWARNING
Active Parking Assist merely aids you by
intervening actively in the steering. If you do
not brake there is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself when
maneuvering and parking.
iWhen PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,
Active Parking Assist brakes automatically
during the parking process. You are
responsible for braking in good time.
Active Parking Assist does not support you
with parking spaces parallel to the direction
of travel if:
Rthe parking space is on a curb
Rthe parking space is apparently blocked,
for example by foliage or grass paving
blocks
Rthe range of movement is too small
Rthe parking space is bordered by an
obstacle which is not clearly defined such
as a tree or a trailer
XStop the vehicle when the parking space
symbol shows the desired parking space in
the instrument cluster.
XShift the transmission to position R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
XTo cancel the procedure: press the
% button on the multifunction steering
wheel or pull away.
or
XTo park using Active Parking Assist:
press the a button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings
message appears in the multifunction
display.
XLet go of the multifunction steering wheel.
XBack up the vehicle, being ready to brake
at all times. Do not exceed a maximum
speed of approximately 5 mph (10 km/h)
when backing up. Otherwise Active Parking
Assist will be canceled.
iIn tight parking spaces, you will achieve
the best parking results by backing up as
far as possible. When doing so, also
observe the PARKTRONIC messages.
XStop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
Maneuvering may be required in tight
parking spaces.
The Park Assist Active Select D
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
XShift the transmission to position D while
the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings
message appears in the multifunction
display.
iYou will achieve the best results by
waiting for the steering procedure to
complete before pulling away.
XDrive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
XStop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
174 Driving systems
Driving and parking
The Park Assist Active Select R
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
XFurther transmission shifts may be
necessary.
As soon as the parking procedure is
complete, the Park Assist Finished
message appears in the multifunction
display.
Active Parking Assist is then deactivated.
PARKTRONIC is still available.
XManeuver if necessary.
XAlways observe the warning messages
displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 170).
Parking tips:
RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the
parking space after parking is dependent
on various factors. These include the
position and shape of the vehicles parked
in front and behind it and the conditions of
the location. It may be the case that Active
Parking Assist guides you too far into a
parking space, or not far enough into it. In
some cases, it may also lead you across or
onto the curb. If necessary, you should
cancel the parking procedure with Active
Parking Assist.
RYou can also engage forward gear
prematurely. The vehicle redirects and
does not drive as far into the parking space.
Should a gear be changed too early, the
parking procedure will be canceled. A
sensible parking position can no longer be
achieved from this position.
Exiting a parking space
In order that Active Parking Assist can
support you when you exit the parking space:
Rthe border of the parking space must not
be too low.
Rthe border of the parking space must not
be too wide. The system maneuvers the
vehicle into a position at a maximum of 45°
to the starting position in the parking
space.
Ra maneuvering distance of at least 24 in
(0.60 m) must be available.
Active Parking Assist can only assist you with
exiting a parking space if you have parked the
vehicle using Active Parking Assist.
XStart the engine.
XSwitch on the turn signal on the side facing
the street.
XShift the transmission to position D or R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
XTo cancel the procedure: press the
% button on the multifunction steering
wheel or pull away.
or
XTo exit a parking space using Active
Parking Assist: press the a button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings
message appears in the multifunction
display.
XLet go of the multifunction steering wheel.
XReverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being
ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed
a maximum speed of approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking
space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist will
be canceled.
XStop when PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
XShift the transmission to position D or R as
required while the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction. The Park Assist
Active Accelerate and Brake
Observe Surroundings message appears
in the multifunction display.
iYou will achieve the best results by
waiting for the steering procedure to
complete before pulling away.
Driving systems 175
Driving and parking
Z
If you back up after activation, the steering
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead
position.
XDrive forwards or back up the vehicle, being
ready to brake at all times.
XStop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone, if not before.
XDrive forwards and reverse as prompted by
the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several
times if necessary.
Once you have exited the parking space
completely, the steering wheel is moved to
the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone
and the Park Assist Finished message
appears in the multifunction display. You will
then have to steer and merge into traffic on
your own. PARKTRONIC is still available.
Canceling Active Parking Assist
You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any
time.
XStop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at
once. The Park Assist Canceled
message appears in the multifunction
display.
or
XPress the PARKTRONIC button on the
center console (Y page 171).
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active
Parking Assist is immediately canceled.
The Park Assist Canceled message
appears in the multifunction display.
Active Parking Assist is canceled
automatically if:
Ryou engage the electric parking brake.
Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no
longer possible.
Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The
÷ warning lamp lights up in the
instrument cluster.
A warning tone sounds. The parking space
symbol disappears and the multifunction
display shows the Park Assist Canceled
message.
If Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must
steer again yourself.
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
accelerator again.
Rear view camera
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not
a replacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering and
parking. When maneuvering or parking, make
sure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the area in which you are
maneuvering.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function
in a limited manner:
Rthe tailgate is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
Rat night or in very dark places
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light
Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
winter
Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In
this event, have the camera position and
setting checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
176 Driving systems
Driving and parking
General notes
Rear view camera : is in the trunk lid handle.
The rear view camera extends, when it is
activated.
The rear view camera is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It uses guide lines to show
the area behind your vehicle in the Audio/
COMAND display.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
iThe text of messages shown in the
COMAND display depends on the language
setting. The following are examples of rear
view camera messages in the COMAND
display.
Activating/deactivating the rear view
camera
XTo activate: make sure that the SmartKey
is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
XMake sure that in the audio system/
COMAND, the "Activation by R gear"
function is selected; see the separate
operating instructions for the audio
system/COMAND.
XEngage reverse gear.
Guide lines are used to show the area
behind the vehicle in the Audio/COMAND
display.
To deactivate: the rear view camera is
deactivated if you:
Rselect transmission position P (vehicles
with automatic transmission)
Rdrive forward ten meters
Rshift the transmission from R to another
position (after 15 seconds)
Rdrive forwards at a speed of over 5 mph
(10km/h)
Displays in the Audio/COMAND display
The rear view camera may show a distorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. The rear view camera does not show
objects in the following positions:
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
Rin the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
! Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Rthe drawbar of a trailer
Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
Rthe rear section of an HGV
Ra slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the
bottom-most guideline.
Driving systems 177
Driving and parking
Z
Lanes
:White guide line without turning the
steering wheel, vehicle width including
the exterior mirrors (static)
;Yellow lane marking tires at current
steering wheel angle, vehicle width to the
outer side of the wheels (dynamic)
=Red guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
?Bumper
Guide lines
?Bumper
ARed guide line at a distance of
approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
BYellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
CVehicle center axle (marker assistance)
DYellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
The lanes and guide lines are only displayed
if you have engaged reverse gear.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Additional displays on vehicles with PARKTRONIC
and COMAND
:Front warning display
;Additional PARKTRONIC measurement
operational readiness indicator
=Rear warning display
Vehicles with PARKTRONIC and
COMAND: if PARKTRONIC is operational
(Y page 169), an additional operational
readiness indicator will appear in COMAND
display ;.If the PARKTRONIC warning
displays are active or light up, warning
displays : and = are also active or light up
correspondingly in the COMAND display.
Reverse parking function
XMake sure that the rear view camera is
activated and the "Reverse parking"
function is selected; see the separate
operating instructions for the audio
system/COMAND.
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
178 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Backing up straight into a parking space
without turning the steering wheel
:White lane with steering wheel straight
;Yellow guide line at a distance of
approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear
of the vehicle
=Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
XWith the help of white lane :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
XUsing the white lane as a guide, carefully
reverse until you reach the end position.
Red guide line = is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost
parallel in the parking space.
Reverse perpendicular parking with the
steering wheel at an angle
XDrive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
Turning the steering wheel
:Red lane indicating the route the vehicle
will take with the steering wheel in its
current position
;Parking space marking
XWhile the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the
parking space until the red lane reaches
parking space marking ;.
XKeep the steering wheel in that position
and back up carefully.
Backing up with the steering wheel turned
:Red lane indicating the route the vehicle
will take with the steering wheel in its
current position
XStop the vehicle when it is almost exactly
in front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as
possible.
Driving systems 179
Driving and parking
Z
Driving to the final position
:White lane at current steering wheel angle
;Parking space marking
XTurn the steering wheel to the center
position while the vehicle is stationary.
:Red guide line at a distance of
approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the
rear of the vehicle
;White lane with steering wheel straight
=End of parking space
XBack up carefully until you have reached
the final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in
the parking space.
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways.
It is active in the range between 50 mph
(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).
If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical
indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
concentration on the part of the driver, it
suggests you take a break.
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
driver. It might not always recognize fatigue
or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
recognize them at all. The system is not a
substitute for a well-rested and attentive
driver.
ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of
fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking
the following criteria into account:
Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering
characteristics
Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length
of journey
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or
not occur at all:
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the
surface is uneven or if there are potholes
Rif there is a strong side wind
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style
with high cornering speeds or high rates of
acceleration
Rif you are predominantly driving slower
than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than
112 mph (180 km/h)
Rif you are currently using COMAND or
making a telephone call with it
Rif the time has been set incorrectly
Rin active driving situations, such as when
you change lanes or change your speed
180 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Warning and display messages in the
multifunction display
XActivate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (Y page 195).
Symbol : appears in the multifunction
display.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, it will not
warn you until at least 20 minutes after
your journey has begun. You then hear an
intermittent warning tone twice and the
Attention Assist: Drowsiness
Detected message appears in the
multifunction display.
XIf necessary, take a break.
XPress the a button to confirm the
message.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
do not take a break, you will be warned again
after 15 minutes at the earliest. The
precondition for this is that
ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical
indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
concentration.
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you
continue your journey and starts assessing
your tiredness again if:
Ryou switch off the engine.
Ryou take off your seat belt and open the
driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
to take a break.
Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 181) and Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 183).
Blind Spot Assist
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
Rvehicles approaching and driving by with a
speed difference of more than 6.8 mph
(11 km/h)
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions
carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving.
iUSA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or altering the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
General notes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
vehicle. It supports you from a speed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
display in the exterior mirrors draws your
attention to vehicles detected in the
Driving systems 181
Driving and parking
Z
monitored area. If you then switch on the
corresponding turn signal to change lanes,
you will also receive a visual and audible
collision warning. For this purpose, Blind Spot
Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper.
For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when
driving, the radar sensor system must be:
Ractivated(Y page 199)
Roperational
Monitoring range of the sensors
In particular, the detection of obstacles can
be impaired if:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain or snow
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike or bicycle
Rthe road has very wide lanes
Rthe road has narrow lanes
Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane
Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated.
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to
10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly
next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.
For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar
sensors in the rear bumper.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may
be the case if the vehicles are driving on the
inner side of their lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
Rwarnings may be issued in error when
driving close to crash barriers or similar
solid lane borders.
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.
trucks, for a prolonged time.
The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are
integrated into the sides of the rear bumper.
Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice
or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. For
example, the radar sensors must not be
covered by bicycle racks or overhanging
loads. Following a severe impact or in the
event of damage to the bumpers, have the
function of the radar sensors checked at a
qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot
Assist may otherwise not work properly.
Indicator and warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
:Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up
yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).
182 Driving systems
Driving and parking
At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) the
indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist
is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring
range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above
20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the
corresponding side lights up red. This warning
is always emitted when a vehicle enters the
blind spot monitoring range from behind or
from the side. When you overtake a vehicle,
the warning only occurs if the difference in
speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot
Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the
corresponding turn signal, a double warning
tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If
the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected
are indicated by the flashing of red warning
lamp :. There are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
XMake sure that the radar sensor system
(Y page 199) and Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 195) are activated in the on-board
computer.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors
light up red for approximately
1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.
Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of a camera at
the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist
detects lane markings on the road and warns
you before you leave your lane
unintentionally.
:Lane Keeping Assist camera
If you select km on the on-board computer in
the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
function (Y page 196), Lane Keeping Assist
is active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the
miles display unit is selected, the assistance
range begins at 40 mph.
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
recognize lane markings.
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
Rgive an unnecessary warning
Rnot give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and stay in lane, in particular if
warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
GWARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There
is a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane
Keeping Assist.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane
Driving systems 183
Driving and parking
Z
Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the
vehicle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not
function if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to
insufficient illumination of the road, or due
to snow, rain, fog or spray
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,
the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road
surface is wet)
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged
or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
Rthere are no, several or unclear lane
markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road
construction work
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge
Rthe road is narrow and winding
Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane
A warning may be given if a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
by means of intermittent vibration in the
steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
XSwitch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard or Adaptive (Y page 195).
Symbol : appears in the multifunction
display.
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
symbol : is highlighted. Lane Keeping
Assist is ready for use.
When Standard is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
When Adaptive is selected, no warning
vibration occurs if:
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
the warnings are suppressed for a certain
period of time.
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP®.
Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
Ryou brake hard.
Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when
necessary and in good time if you cross the
lane marking, the system recognizes certain
conditions and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
freeway.
Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
184 Driving systems
Driving and parking
Useful information ............................ 186
Important safety notes .................... 186
Displays and operation .................... 186
Menus and submenus ...................... 189
Display messages ............................. 200
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 224
185
On-board computer and displays
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you operate information systems and
communication equipment integrated in the
vehicle while driving, you will be distracted
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the
equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
GWARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or
malfunctioned, you may not recognize
function restrictions in systems relevant to
safety. The operating safety of your vehicle
may be impaired. There is a risk of an
accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the on-board computer.
The on-board computer only shows messages
or warnings from certain systems in the
multifunction display. You should therefore
make sure your vehicle is operating safely at
all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not
operating safely may cause an accident.
For an overview, see the instrument panel
illustration (Y page 29).
Displays and operation
Instrument cluster lighting
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
displays and the controls in the vehicle
interior can be adjusted using the brightness
control knob.
The brightness control knob is located on the
bottom left of the instrument cluster
(Y page 29).
XTurn the brightness control knob clockwise
or counter-clockwise.
If the light switch is set to Ã, T or
L, the brightness is dependent upon
the brightness of the ambient light.
iThe light sensor in the instrument cluster
automatically controls the brightness of
the multifunction display.
In daylight, the displays in the instrument
cluster are not illuminated.
Coolant temperature display
GWARNING
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked into
the engine compartment to catch fire. You
could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns which can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
186 Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
! A display message is shown if the coolant
temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is over
248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The
engine will otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperature gage is in the
instrument cluster on the right-hand side.
Under normal operating conditions and with
the specified coolant level, the coolant
temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Tachometer
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as
this could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around
freezing point.
The outside temperature display is in the
multifunction display.
Changes in the outside temperature are
displayed after a short delay.
Speedometer with segments
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
RCruise control activated (Y page 157):
The segments light up from the stored
speed to the maximum speed.
RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 159):
One or two segments in the set speed
range light up.
RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
The segments between the speed of the
vehicle in front and the stored speed light
up.
Operating the on-board computer
Overview
:Multifunction display
;Switches on the Voice Control System;
see the separate operating instructions
=Right control panel
?Left control panel
ABack button
XTo activate the on-board computer: turn
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Displays and operation 187
On-board computer and displays
Z
Left control panel
=
;
RCalls up the menu and menu bar
9
:
Press briefly:
RScrolls in lists
RSelects a submenu or function
RIn the Audio menu: selects a
stored station, an audio track or
a video scene
RIn the Tel(telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
selects a name or telephone
number
9
:
Press and hold:
RIn the Audio menu: selects the
previous/next station or selects
an audio track or a video scene
using rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu,
starts rapid scrolling through the
phone book
aRConfirms a selection/display
message
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station
Right control panel
~RRejects or ends a call
RExits phone book/redial
memory
6RMakes or accepts a call
RSwitches to the redial memory
W
X
RAdjusts the volume
8RMute
Back button
%Press briefly:
RBack
RSwitches off the Voice Control
System; see the separate
operating instructions
RHides display messages/calls
up the last Trip menu function
used
RExits the telephone book/redial
memory
%Press and hold:
RCalls up the standard display in
the Trip menu
Multifunction display
:Time
;Permanent display: outside temperature
or speed (Y page 197)
=Text field
?Menu bar
188 Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
ADrive program (Y page 141)
BTransmission position (Y page 141)
XTo show menu bar ?: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or
submenu as well as display messages.
iYou can set the time using the audio
system or COMAND; see the separate
operating instructions.
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
XjYActive Parking Assist (Y page 172)
CRUISE Cruise Control (Y page 157)
èRear window wiper (Y page 112)
_Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 102)
ÀATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 180)
ÃLane Keeping Assist (Y page 183)
ëHOLD function (Y page 167)
ÄDistance warning function
(Y page 233)
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 187).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
RTrip menu (Y page 189)
RNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 191)
RAudio menu (Y page 192)
RTel (telephone) menu (Y page 193)
RDriveAssist (Assistance) menu
(Y page 194)
RServ menu (Y page 196)
RSett menu (Y page 196)
The Audio, Navi and Tel menus differ slightly
in vehicles with Audio 20 and in vehicles with
COMAND. The examples given in this
Operator's Manual apply to vehicles
equipped with COMAND.
Trip menu
Standard display
XPress and hold the % button on the
steering wheel until the Trip menu with
trip odometer : and odometer ; is
shown.
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
Example: trip computer "From Start"
:Distance
;Time
=Average speed
?Average fuel consumption
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
From Start or From Reset.
The values in the From Start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey, while
the values in the From Reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (Y page 190).
Menus and submenus 189
On-board computer and displays
Z
The From Start trip computer is
automatically reset when:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
If the value exceeds 9,999 hours or
99,999 miles, the From Reset trip computer
is automatically reset.
ECO display
Example: ECO display
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
XPress 9 or : to select ECO
DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be
automatically reset.
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 153).
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
current fuel consumption ; and
approximate range :.
Approximate range : is calculated
according to the current driving style and the
amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a
small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the
display shows a vehicle being refueled C
instead of range :.
Digital speedometer
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
digital speedometer :.
Resetting values
Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"
You can reset the values of the following
functions:
RTrip odometer
R"From Start" trip computer
R"From Reset" trip computer
RECO display
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
XPress the a button.
XPress the : button to select Yes and
press a to confirm.
190 Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
iWhen you reset the values in the "ECO
display", the values in the trip computer
"From start" are likewise reset. When you
reset the values in the trip computer "From
start", the values in the "ECO display" are
likewise reset.
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
XSwitch on Audio 20 with Becker® MAP
PILOT or COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Navi menu.
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. For more
information, see the separate operating
instructions.
Route guidance not active
:Direction of travel
;Current road
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
:Distance to the destination
;Distance to the next change of direction
=Current road
?"Follow the road's course" symbol
Change of direction announced without a
lane recommendation
:Road into which the change of direction
leads
;Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=Symbol for change of direction
When a change of direction is announced, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance
indicator shortens towards the top of the
display as you approach the point of the
announced change of direction.
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
:Road into which the change of direction
leads
;Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=Lane recommendation
?New lane during a change of direction
AUninterrupted lane
BSymbol for change of direction
On multilane roads, the system can display
lane recommendation = for the next change
of direction. During the change of direction,
additional lanes may be displayed.
Menus and submenus 191
On-board computer and displays
Z
Lane recommendations are only displayed if
the relevant data is available on the digital
map.
Other status indicators of the
navigation system
RO: you have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
RNew Route... or Calculating Route:
calculating a new route
ROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle
position is outside the area of the digital
map (off-map position).
RNo Route: no route could be calculated to
the selected destination.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
:Waveband
;Station frequency with memory position
iThe memory position is only displayed
along with station ; if this has been
stored.
XSwitch on the audio system or COMAND
and select Radio; see the separate
operating instructions.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
XTo select a stored station: briefly press
the 9 or : button.
XTo select a station from the station
list: press and briefly hold the 9
or : button.
If no station list is received:
XTo select a station using the station
search: press and briefly hold the 9
or : button.
iFor information on changing waveband
and storing stations, see the separate
operating instructions.
iSIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
For more information on satellite radio
operation, see the separate operating
instructions.
Operating an audio player or audio
media
CD changer display (example)
:Current CD in the CD changer
;Current title
Audio data from various audio devices or
media can be played, depending on the
equipment installed in the vehicle.
XSwitch on the audio system or COMAND
and activate audio CD/DVD mode or MP3
mode; see the separate operating
instructions.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
XTo select the next/previous track:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
XTo select a track from the track list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until desired
track ; has been reached.
192 Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
If you press and hold 9 or :, the
rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all
audio drives or data carriers support this
function.
If track information is stored on the audio
device or medium, the multifunction display
will show the number and title of the track.
The current track does not appear in audio
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external
audio source connected).
Video DVD operation
DVD changer display (example)
:Current DVD in the DVD changer
;Current scene
XSwitch on COMAND and select video DVD;
see the separate operating instructions.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
XTo select the next/previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
XTo select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until desired
scene ; has been reached.
Telephone menu
Introduction
GWARNING
If you operate information systems and
communication equipment integrated in the
vehicle while driving, you will be distracted
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the
equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the
legal requirements for the country in which
you are currently driving.
XSwitch on your mobile phone and audio
system or COMAND, see the separate
operating instructions.
XEstablish a Bluetooth® connection to the
audio system or COMAND; see the
separate operating instructions.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display
messages in the multifunction display:
RPhone READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a
network and is ready to receive.
RPhone No Service: there is no network
available or the mobile phone is searching
for a network.
Accepting a call
Example: incoming call
XPress the 6 button on the steering
wheel to accept an incoming call.
If someone calls you when you are in the
Tel menu, a display message appears in the
multifunction display.
If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still
accept a call.
Menus and submenus 193
On-board computer and displays
Z
Rejecting or ending a call
XPress the ~ button on the steering
wheel.
If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still
reject or end a call.
Dialing a number from the phone book
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
XPress the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
XPress the 9 or : button to select the
desired name.
To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the
9 or : button for longer than one
second.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
XIf only one telephone number is stored
for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing.
or
XIf there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
XPress the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
XPress the 6 or a button to start
dialing.
or
XIf you do not want to make a call: press
the ~ or % button.
Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
XPress the 6 button to switch to the
redial memory.
XPress the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.
XPress the 6 or a button to start
dialing.
or
XIf you do not want to make a call: press
the ~ or % button.
Assistance menu
Introduction
In the DriveAssist menu, you have the
following options:
Rshowing the distance display
Ractivating/deactivating ESP®
Ractivating/deactivating the distance
warning function
Ractivating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST
Ractivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
Ractivating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
Showing the distance display
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
Distance Display.
XPress the a button.
The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display
appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 163).
Deactivating/activating ESP®
Further information about ESP®(Y page 62).
194 Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
XStart the engine.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
ESP.
XPress the a button.
XTo deactivate: press a again.
The å warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
XTo activate: press a again.
The å warning lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Switching the distance warning
function on and off
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
XPress 9 or : to select Distance
Warning.
XPress the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
XTo activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When the distance warning function is
activated, the multifunction display shows
the Ä symbol if the HOLD function is not
activated (Y page 167).
Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: if
PARKTRONIC is activated and you are driving
at a speed under 22 mph (35 km/h), the j
Active Parking Assist symbol is shown instead
of the Ä symbol (Y page 172).
Further information on the distance warning
function (Y page 60).
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
XPress 9 or : to select Attention
Asst.
XPress the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
XTo activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 180) is
activated, the À symbol appears in the
multifunction display when the ignition is on.
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
XPress 9 or : to select Blind Spot
Assist.
XPress the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
XTo activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
For further information about Blind Spot
Assist, see (Y page 181).
When the Blind Spot Assist: Sensors
Deactivated message is shown, the radar
sensors are deactivated.
XSwitch on the radar sensor system
(Y page 199).
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
XPress 9 or : on the steering wheel
to select Lane Keep. Asst.
Menus and submenus 195
On-board computer and displays
Z
XPress the a button.
The current selection is displayed.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to set Off,
Standard or Adaptive.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
If Lane Keeping Assist is activated
(Y page 183) and the ignition is switched on,
the à symbol appears in the multifunction
display.
Maintenance menu
In the Serv menu, you have the following
options:
RCalling up display messages in message
memory (Y page 200)
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
system (Y page 305)
RCalling up the service due date
(Y page 270)
Settings menu
Introduction
In the Sett menu, you have the following
options:
Rchanging the instrument cluster settings
Rchanging the light settings
Rchanging the vehicle settings
Rchanging the convenience settings
Rrestoring the factory settings
Instrument cluster
Selecting the unit of measurement for
distance
You can determine whether the multifunction
display shows some messages in miles or
kilometers.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Inst. Cluster submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
function.
You will see the selected setting km or
miles.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for
distance applies to:
Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu
Rthe odometer and the trip odometer
Rthe trip computer
Rthe current consumption and the range
Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi
menu
Rcruise control
RDISTRONIC PLUS
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
Switching the additional speedometer
on/off
Only vehicles with manual transmission have
this function.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Inst. Cluster submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
196 Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
XPress : or 9 to select the
Speedometer [mph]: function.
You will see the selected setting: On or
Off.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
iSpeed is displayed in mph.
The Speedometer [mph] function allows you
to choose whether the status area in the
multifunction display always shows the speed
in mph instead of the outside temperature.
Selecting the permanent display function
You can determine whether the multifunction
display permanently shows your speed or the
outside temperature.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Inst. Cluster submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Permanent Display: function.
You will see the selected setting Outside
Temperature or Speedometer [km/h]
(USA)/Speedometer [mph] (Canada).
XPress the a button to save the setting.
iThe speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph
(Canada).
Lights
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
off
Daytime running lamps are required by law
(Canada only). You cannot set the "daytime
running lamps" function via the on-board
computer.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Daytime Running Lights function.
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
or Disabled.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime running
lamps (Y page 99).
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/
off
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist function.
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
or Disabled.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
For further information about Adaptive
Highbeam Assist, see (Y page 102).
Setting the brightness of the ambient
lighting
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Amb. Light +/-function.
You will see the selected setting.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to any level from Off to Level
5 (bright).
XPress the a or % button to save the
setting.
Menus and submenus 197
On-board computer and displays
Z
Activating/deactivating surround
lighting and exterior lighting delayed
switch-off
If you have activated the Locator
Lighting: function and the light switch is set
to Ã, the following functions are activated
when it is dark:
Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
with the SmartKey. If you start the engine,
the surround lighting is switched off and
automatic headlamp mode is activated
(Y page 99).
Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
exterior lighting remains lit for
60 seconds after the engine is switched off.
If you close all the doors and the trunk lid,
the exterior lighting goes off after
15 seconds.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Locator Lighting function.
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
or Disabled.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the
exterior lighting temporarily:
XBefore leaving the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is
deactivated.
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is
reactivated the next time you start the
engine.
iDepending on your vehicle's equipment,
when the surround lighting and delayed
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the
following light up:
RParking lamps
RFront fog lamps
RLow-beam headlamps
RDaytime running lamps
RSide marker lamps
RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors
Activating/deactivating the interior
lighting delayed switch-off
If you activate the Interior Lighting
Delay function, the interior lighting remains
on for 20seconds after you remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Lights submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Interior Lighting Delay function.
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
or Disabled.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking mechanism
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Automatic Door Lock function.
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
or Disabled.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
If you select the Automatic Door Lock
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).
iFor further information on the automatic
locking feature, see (Y page 74).
198 Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock
Feedback: function, an acoustic signal
sounds when you lock the vehicle.
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic Lock Feedback: function.
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
or Disabled.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
Activating/deactivating the radar sensor
system
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual).
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
or Disabled.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
Convenience
Switching the fold-in mirrors when
locking feature on/off
This function is only available on vehicles with
the memory function (Y page 95).
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Fold Mirrors in when Locking:
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
or Disabled.
XPress the a button to save the setting.
If you switch on the Fold Mirrors in when
Locking: function, the exterior mirrors fold
in when you lock the vehicle. If you unlock the
vehicle and then open the driver's or front-
passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out
again.
If you have switched the function on and you
fold the exterior mirrors in using the button
on the door (Y page 93), they will not fold out
automatically. The exterior mirrors can then
only be folded out using the button on the
door.
Restoring the factory settings
XPress the = or ; button on the
steering wheel to select the Sett menu.
XPress the : or 9 button to select the
Factory Setting submenu.
XPress a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings? message
appears.
XPress the : or 9 button to select
No or Yes.
XPress a to confirm the selection.
If you have selected Yes , the multifunction
display shows a confirmation message.
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Lights: function in the Lights submenu is
only reset if the vehicle is stationary.
Menus and submenus 199
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function
(Y page 167) and parking (Y page 149).
Hiding display messages
XPress the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority
display messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the
messages have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can
call up the display messages:
XPress = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows, for example, 2 Messages.
XPress the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
XPress a to confirm.
XPress the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
200 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!÷
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability
Program), BAS (Brake Assist), the HOLD function and hill start
assist are temporarily unavailable.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XCarefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,
making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph
(20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
!÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
unavailable due to a malfunction.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.
In addition, the J, ÷, å and ! warning lamps light
up in the instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
Display messages 201
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
÷
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
unavailable.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XCarefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road,
making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph
(20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
202 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable
due to a malfunction.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
T!
÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, the
HOLD function and hill start assist are not available due to a
malfunction.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
F(USA
only)!(Canada
only)
The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic
release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 150).
You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.
XRelease the electric parking brake manually.
Display messages 203
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Please Release
Parking Brake The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and a warning tone sounds.
You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking
(Y page 150).
F(USA
only)!(Canada
only)
Parking Brake See
Operator's Manual
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
XSwitch the ignition off.
XPress the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.
XShift the transmission to P.
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA
only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
XSwitch off the ignition and turn it back on.
XRelease the electric parking brake manually.
or
XRelease the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 150).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
XDo not drive on.
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
204 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
XSwitch off the ignition and turn it back on.
XRelease the electric parking brake manually.
To apply:
XSwitch off the ignition and turn it back on.
XApply the electric parking brake manually.
If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
XDo not drive on.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 320).
XShift the transmission to P.
XTurn the front wheels towards the curb.
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA
only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
released. It then goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
XSwitch off the ignition and turn it back on.
XApply the electric parking brake.
If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:
XShift the transmission to P.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:
XRelease the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 150).
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 205
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or
release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA
only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to
apply the electric parking brake manually.
XShift the transmission to P.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
F(USA
only)!(Canada
only)
Parking Brake
Inoperative
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA
only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten
seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or
released. It then goes out or remains lit.
The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of
overvoltage or undervoltage.
XRemove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging the battery or restarting the engine.
XEngage or release the electric parking brake.
If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking
brake:
XSwitch off the ignition and turn it back on.
XEngage or release the electric parking brake.
If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
The display message is only shown while the vehicle is in motion.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA
only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.
XShift the transmission to P.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
F(USA
only)!(Canada
only)
Turn On the
Ignition to
Release the
Parking Brake
The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the
ignition was switched off.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
206 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$(USA
only)J(Canada
only)
Check Brake Fluid
Level
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone
sounds.
GWARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
XDo not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
#
Check Brake Pad
Wear
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
G
mbrace Inoperative
One or more main features of the mbrace system are
malfunctioning.
XHave the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified
specialist workshop.
6
SRS Malfunction
Service Required
There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
cluster.
GWARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Further information on occupant safety (Y page 38).
Display messages 207
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
Front Left
Malfunction
Service Required 
or Front Right
Malfunction
Service Required
SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6
warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
GWARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
6
Rear Left
Malfunction
Service Required 
or Rear Right
Malfunction
Service Required
SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6
warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
GWARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
6
Rear Center
Malfunction
Service Required
SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lamp
also lights up in the instrument cluster.
GWARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
6
Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required 
or Right Side
Curtain Airbag
Malfunction
Service Required
There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window
curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the
instrument cluster.
GWARNING
The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be
triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Lights
iDisplay messages about LEDs:
208 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check Left
Cornering Light or 
Check Right
Cornering Light
The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Low
Beam or Check
Right Low Beam
The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Rear Left
Turn Signal or 
Check Rear Right
Turn Signal
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Front Left
Turn Signal or 
Check Front Right
Turn Signal
The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Mirror
Turn Signal or 
Check Right Mirror
Turn Signal
The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is
defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Center Brake
Lamp
The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 209
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check Left Brake
Lamp or Check
Right Brake Lamp
The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Tail
and Brake Lamps or 
Check Right Tail
and Brake Lamps
The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left High
Beam or Check
Right High Beam
The left or right-hand high beam is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
License Plate Lamp
The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Fog
Lamp or Check
Right Fog Lamp
The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Rear Fog Lamp
The rear fog lamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Front Left
Parking Lamp or 
Check Front Right
Parking Lamp
The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
210 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Backup Light
The backup lamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Tail
Lamp or Check
Right Tail Lamp
The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Front Left
Sidemarker Lamp or 
Check Front Right
Sidemarker Lamp
The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Rear Left
Sidemarker Lamp or 
Check Rear Right
Sidemarker Lamp
The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Daytime
Running Light or 
Check Right
Daytime Running
Light
The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.
XCheck whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself
(Y page 104).
or
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Active Light
System Inoperative
The active light function is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
The exterior lighting is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
The light sensor is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 211
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Switch Off Lights
The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
XTurn the light switch to Ã.
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily
inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
XClean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,
the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is
displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+
Check Coolant
Level See
Operator's Manual
The coolant level is too low.
! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
XAdd coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(Y page 269).
XIf coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
?The fan motor is faulty.
XAt coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
XAvoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
212 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn
Engine Off
The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
GWARNING
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).
XWait until the engine has cooled down.
XMake sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
XDo not start the engine again until the display message goes out
and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).
Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
XPay attention to the coolant temperature display.
XIf the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
#The battery is not being charged.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes are:
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
XOpen the hood.
XCheck whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages 213
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
4
Check Engine Oil
At Next Refueling
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
A warning tone also sounds.
XCheck the oil level when next refueling, at the latest
(Y page 267).
XIf necessary, add engine oil (Y page 268).
XHave the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will
otherwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com (USA only).
æ
Fuel Level Low
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
XRefuel at the nearest gas station.
çThere is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
XRefuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
æ
Gas Cap Loose
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
XCheck that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
XClose the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
214 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Driving systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
À
Attention Assist:
Take a Break!
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue
or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone
also sounds.
XIf necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À
Attention Assist
Inoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
ë
Off
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
XReactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 167).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly
depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
A warning tone also sounds.
XCheck the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 167).
Radar Sensor
Deactivated See
Operator's Manual
The radar sensor system is deactivated.
XSwitch on the radar sensor system (Y page 199).
Lane Keeping
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
message disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).
XClean the windshield.
Display messages 215
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Lane Keeping
Assist Inoperative
Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's
ManualBlind Spot
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rthe sensors are dirty.
Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
message disappears.
Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).
XClean the sensors (Y page 275).
XRestart the engine.
Blind Spot Assist
Inoperative
Blind Spot Assist is defective.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist
Canceled
The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been
fastened.
XRepeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel
while steering intervention was active.
XWhile steering intervention is active, make sure that the
multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.
XUse Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 172).
216 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Park Assist
Inoperative
You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking
maneuvers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after
approximately ten minutes (Y page 172).
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSwitch off and restart the engine.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
PARKTRONIC is defective.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 159). If it was
deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS Now
Available
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been
temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 159).
DISTRONIC PLUS
Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:
Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe sensors in the radiator trim are dirty
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display
message disappears.
DISTRONIC is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).
XClean the sensors in the radiator trim (Y page 275).
XRestart the engine.
Display messages 217
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
DISTRONIC PLUS
Inoperative
DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. Adaptive Brake Assist may also
have failed.
A warning tone also sounds.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
DISTRONIC PLUS
Passive
You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
XRemove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS
--- mph
An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.
XCheck the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 161).
Cruise Control
Inoperative
Cruise control is defective.
A warning tone also sounds.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control
--- mph
A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for
example.
XIf conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
store the speed.
XCheck the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 158).
218 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Tires
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check
Tire Pressure Soon
The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
loss in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
GWARNING
With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the
following hazards:
Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed
increase.
Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may
be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
XStop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).
XIf there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 281).
XCheck the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire
pressure.
XRestart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 305).
Check Tire Pressure
Then Restart Run
Flat Indicator
The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display
message and has not been restarted since.
XSet the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
XRestart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 305).
Run Flat Indicator
Inoperative
The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 219
On-board computer and displays
Z
Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to 'P' or 'N'
to Start Engine
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
position R or D.
XShift the transmission to position P or N.
Auxiliary Battery
Malfunction
The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer
being charged.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.
XUntil then, set the automatic transmission to position P before
you switch off the engine.
XBefore leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Depress Brake to
Start Engine
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
position N without depressing the brake pedal.
XDepress the brake pedal.
To Deselect P or N,
Depress Brake and
Start Engine
You have attempted to shift the transmission to position R or D
without starting the engine.
XStart the engine.
XDepress the brake pedal.
iIt is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to
the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then
can the parking lock be deactivated. If you do not depress the
brake pedal, you can move the DIRECT SELECT lever but the
parking lock remains engaged.
iAt transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †) you
can only shift out of position P into another transmission
position when the engine is running.
Apply Brake to
Shift from 'P'
You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to
position R, N or D without depressing the brake pedal.
XDepress the brake pedal.
Transmission Not
in P
Risk of Vehicle
Rolling Away
The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N
or D.
A warning tone also sounds.
XShift the transmission to position P.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).
220 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Service Required
Do Not Shift Gears
Visit Dealer
You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
A warning tone also sounds.
If transmission position D is selected:
XDrive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
XNotify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Only Shift
to 'P' when
Vehicle is
Stationary
The vehicle is moving.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XShift the transmission to position P.
Reversing Not
Possible Service
Required
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning. You cannot back
up.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission
Malfunction
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission
Malfunction Stop
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
Stop Vehicle Shift
to P Leave Engine
Running
The automatic transmission has overheated.
XDrive on carefully.
The automatic transmission is available again when the display
message goes out.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).
XWait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the
display message has disappeared.
Display messages 221
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
AThe tailgate is open.
GWARNING
When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the tailgate is open.
There is a risk of poisoning.
XClose the tailgate.
?The hood is open.
GWARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
XApply the electric parking brake.
XClose the hood.
CAt least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
XClose all the doors.
Ð
Power Steering
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
GWARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
XCheck whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
XIf you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
XIf you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/
receiver range.
XWait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
222 Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
¥
Check Washer Fluid
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
iIf you do not mix antifreeze with the washer fluid in the winter
months, then the washer fluid could freeze in the washer fluid
reservoir. In this case the Check Washer Fluid display
message could also be shown in the multifunction display.
XAdd washer fluid (Y page 269).
Wiper
Malfunctioning
The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning
Flashers
Malfunctioning
The hazard warning lamps are faulty.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
SmartKey
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
XUse the correct SmartKey.
+
Take Your Key from
Ignition
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.
XRemove the SmartKey.
+
Obtain a New Key
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 223
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Seat belts
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ü
After starting the
engine, the red seat
belt warning lamp lights
up for six seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
to fasten their seat belts.
XFasten your seat belt (Y page 45).
ü
After starting the
engine, the red seat
belt warning lamp lights
up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds
for up to six seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
XFasten your seat belt (Y page 45).
The warning tone ceases.
ü
The red seat belt
warning lamp lights up
after the engine starts,
as soon as the driver's
or the front-passenger
door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
XFasten your seat belt (Y page 45).
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
XRemove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü
The red seat belt
warning lamp flashes
and an intermittent
audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. In
addition, you are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have
briefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
XFasten your seat belt (Y page 45).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. In addition, you are
driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have briefly driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
XRemove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
224 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Safety systems
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
The red brake system
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is
running. A warning tone
also sounds.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
GWARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).
XDo not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the
malfunction.
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
!
The yellow ABS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a
malfunction. BAS (Brake Assist), COLLISION PREVENTION
ASSIST, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), the HOLD function
and hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic
transmission, will not be available.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 225
On-board computer and displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
The yellow ABS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION
ASSIST, ESP®, EBD (electronic brake force distribution), the HOLD
function and hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for
example.
Possible causes are:
RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.
RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident.
XCarefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight
steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
226 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
The yellow ABS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running. A
warning tone also
sounds.
EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, COLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST, ESP®, the HOLD function and hill start assist
are unavailable, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
$ (USA only)
J (Canada only)
֌!
The red brake warning
lamp, the yellow ESP®
and ESP® OFF warning
lamps and the yellow
ABS warning lamp are
lit while the engine is
running.
ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, COLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST, EBD, the HOLD function and hill start assist
are also unavailable, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore
lock if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely
affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation
can increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 227
On-board computer and displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷
The yellow ESP®
warning lamp flashes
while the vehicle is in
motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of
skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
XWhen pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary.
XEase off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
XAdapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
XDo not deactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 62).
å
The yellow ESP® OFF
warning lamp is lit while
the engine is running.
ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilization are deactivated. ESP® will not
stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
GWARNING
If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XReactivate ESP®.
For exceptions, see: (Y page 62).
XAdapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP® cannot be activated:
XHave ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
֌
The yellow ESP® and
ESP® OFF warning
lamps are lit while the
engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function
and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
228 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
֌
The yellow ESP® and
ESP® OFF warning
lamps are lit while the
engine is running.
ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
unavailable.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST may also have failed.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
GWARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
XCarefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight
steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XDrive on carefully.
XVisit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 229
On-board computer and displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
F (USA only)
! (Canada only)
The red indicator lamp
for the electric parking
brake flashes or lights
up and/or the yellow
warning lamp for the
electric parking brake
lights up.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
6
The red SRS warning
lamp is lit while the
engine is running.
There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System).
GWARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not
be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
XDrive on carefully.
XHave SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
For further information about SRS, see (Y page 38).
230 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
;
The yellow Check
Engine warning lamp
lights up while the
engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
Rin the engine management
Rin the fuel injection system
Rin the exhaust system
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be running in emergency mode.
XHave the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
iIn some states, you must immediately visit a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning
lamp lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal
requirements. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations
apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
æ
The yellow reserve fuel
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is
running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
XRefuel at the nearest gas station.
æ
The yellow reserve fuel
warning lamp flashes
while the engine is
running.
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
XCheck that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
XIf the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
cap.
XIf the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist
workshop.
?
The red coolant
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is
running and the coolant
temperature gage is at
the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is
defective.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
driving under any circumstances.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).
XConsult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 231
On-board computer and displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The red coolant
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is
running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator
may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be
malfunctioning.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).
XLeave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
XCheck the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 269). Observe
the warning notes.
XIf you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
XMake sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
XDo not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is
under 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
XDrive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
XAvoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
?
The red coolant
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is
running. A warning tone
also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The
airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level
may be too low.
GWARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire.
Vapor from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns
which can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
XObserve the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
XPull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 149).
232 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
XLeave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
XCheck the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 269). Observe
the warning notes.
XIf you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
XMake sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
XAt coolant temperatures under 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next
qualified specialist workshop.
XAvoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
·
The red distance
warning lamp lights up
while the vehicle is in
motion. A warning tone
also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line
of travel at too high a speed.
XBe prepared to brake immediately.
XPay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
brake or take evasive action.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 233
On-board computer and displays
Z
234
Useful information ............................ 236
Loading guidelines ............................ 236
Stowage areas .................................. 237
Features ............................................. 247
235
Stowage and features
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
Loading guidelines
GWARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking or
a sudden change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
GWARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running,
particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust
fumes could enter the passenger
compartment. There is a risk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the
tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
The handling characteristics of a laden
vehicle are dependent on the distribution of
the load within the vehicle. For this reason,
you should observe the following notes when
transporting a load:
RNever exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight or the gross axle
weight rating of the vehicle (including
occupants). The values are specified on the
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of
the driver's door.
RThe cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects.
RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as
possible and as low down in the cargo
compartment as possible.
RThe load must not protrude above the
upper edge of the seat backrests.
RAlways place the load against the rear or
front seat backrests. Make sure that the
seat backrests are securely locked into
place.
RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcel
nets to transport loads and luggage.
RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening
materials appropriate for the weight and
size of the load.
RHook in the cargo net when loading.
RThe maximum load capacity of the stowage
well under the cargo compartment floor is
55 lbs (25 kg).
RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edges
for protection.
! Do not position the load on one part of the
folding cargo compartment floor only. The
maximum load capacity of the folding cargo
compartment floor is 220 lbs (100 kg).
Distribute the weight evenly to avoid
damaging the cargo compartment floor.
Place a solid board under the load if
necessary. Please note that the load on the
cargo compartment floor will be increased
when the load is lashed down.
236 Loading guidelines
Stowage and features
Stowage areas
Stowage space
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets
or stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 236).
Stowage compartments in the front
Glove box
XTo open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
XTo close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
until it engages.
iThere is a pen holder at the top of the
glove box flap.
Eyeglasses compartment
XTo open: press marking :.
Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment
is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Stowage compartment in the center
console
XTo open: press the marking on cover :.
iDepending on the vehicle's equipment,
there is an open instead of a closed
stowage compartment or an ashtray in the
center console.
Stowage areas 237
Stowage and features
Z
Stowage compartment in front of the
armrest (vehicles with automatic
transmission)
XTo open: press the marking on cover :.
iYou can remove the non-slip mat and the
insert for cleaning. When removing the
insert you will have to overcome some
slight resistance.
Stowage compartment under the armrest
XTo open: on vehicles with moveable
armrests, make sure that the armrest is in
the rearmost position.
XPress button : and fold the armrest up.
iDepending on the vehicle's equipment, a
USB connection and an AUX IN connection
or a Media Interface are installed in the
stowage compartment. A Media Interface
is a universal interface for mobile audio
equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player
(see the separate COMAND Operating
Instructions).
Stowage compartment under the driver's
seat and front-passenger seat
GWARNING
If you exceed the maximum load for the
stowage compartment, the cover may not be
able to restrain the items. Items may be
thrown out of the stowage compartment and
hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury,
particularly in the event of sudden braking or
a sudden change in direction.
Never exceed the maximum permissible load
for the stowage compartment. Stow and
secure heavy objects in the cargo
compartment.
The maximum permissible load of the
stowage compartment is 2.6 lbs (1.5 kg).
XTo open: pull handle : up and fold
cover ; forwards.
Stowage space in the rear
Stowage compartment in the rear center
console
238 Stowage areas
Stowage and features
XTo open: pull down the top of stowage
compartment : by the edge of the handle.
iDepending on the vehicle's equipment,
there may be an open stowage space above
the stowage compartment.
Folding table
GWARNING
If the folding table is folded out while the
vehicle is in motion, passengers can be
thrown against it, particularly in the event of
an accident, heavy braking or a sudden
change of direction. There is a risk of injury.
Fold the folding table away before each
journey.
! Do not load the folding table with more
than the maximum permissible load of
4.4 lbs (2 kg).
XTo fold out: pull folding table : up in the
direction of the arrow to the desired
position.
XTo fold away: push folding table : down
onto the backrest.
Parcel nets
Parcel nets are located in the front-passenger
footwell and on the back of the driver's and
the front-passenger seat.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 236)
and the safety notes regarding stowage
spaces (Y page 237).
Folding backrest on the front-
passenger seat
GWARNING
If the backrest of the front-passenger seat is
folded forward, rear seat passengers can
come in contact with parts of the seat
mechanism. particularly in the event of an
accident, heavy braking or a sudden change
of direction. There is a risk of injury.
If a passenger travels in the vehicle while the
front-passenger seat is folded forward, they
must sit in the rear seat behind the driver.
The backrest of the front-passenger seat can
be folded forwards to increase the cargo
compartment capacity.
XTo fold forward: gently push the backrest
back.
XPull release handle : and fold the
backrest fully onto the seat cushion until it
engages.
XTo fold back: gently push the backrest
down and pull release handle :.
XFold the seat backrest back until it
engages.
Through-loading facility in the rear
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 236).
Stowage areas 239
Stowage and features
Z
XTo open: fold down seat armrest :.
XPull the cover, which can now be seen,
forwards by the grip until it lies on
armrest :.
XPull the center head restraint on the rear
bench seat into the uppermost position
(Y page 89).
XSlide locking mechanism = in the
direction of the arrow.
XSwing flap ; fully to the side.
Flap ; is held open by a magnet.
XTo close: swing flap ; in the cargo
compartment back until it engages.
XFold the cover forwards until it engages into
armrest :.
XFold armrest : up fully if necessary.
Cargo compartment enlargement
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold
forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo
compartment cannot be restrained by the
seat backrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
! Before folding the backrest in the rear
compartment forwards, make sure that the
rear compartment armrest and the
cupholder are folded in. They may
otherwise be damaged.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 236).
Vehicles without the EASY-VARIO-PLUS
system
Folding the rear seat backrest forward
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat
backrests can be folded forwards separately
to increase the cargo compartment capacity.
240 Stowage areas
Stowage and features
XFully insert the backrest head restraints
(Y page 90).
XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
XPull left-hand or right-hand release
handle ; of the seat backrest forwards.
Corresponding seat backrest : is
released.
XFold backrest : forwards.
XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Folding the rear seat backrest back
XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be
damaged.
XFold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer
visible.
XAdjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 90).
XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Vehicles with the EASY-VARIO-PLUS
system
Folding the rear seat backrest forward
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat
backrests can be folded forwards separately
to increase the cargo compartment capacity.
XFully insert the backrest head restraints
(Y page 90).
XMove the rear seat as far back as possible
(Y page 243).
XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
XPull right or left loop ; on the backrest in
the direction of the arrow.
Corresponding seat backrest : is
released.
XFold down backrest : fully.
XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Stowage areas 241
Stowage and features
Z
Folding the rear seat backrest back
XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be
damaged.
XSwing backrest : back.
XAdjust the backrest to the desired angle by
pulling the loop (Y page 242).
XAdjust the head restraints if necessary
(Y page 90).
XMove the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Notes on using the cargo compartment
Load position
Making the best use of your cargo
compartment:
RLoad capacity is increased when
backrest : is set to the load position (90°)
(Y page 242).
RVehicles with a height-adjustable trunk
floor: a level load surface can be obtained
by moving the trunk floor to the upper
position (Y page 246).
RA larger load area can be obtained by
moving the rear bench seat as far forward
as possible (Y page 243).
RThe load area can be lengthened by folding
forward the folding backrest of the front-
passenger seat (Y page 239) and the
corresponding backrest in the rear.
Adjusting the angle of the rear seat
backrests
You can set the angle of the seat backrests
to one of 13 detent positions.
XPull right or left release loop ; forwards in
the direction of the arrow.
Corresponding seat backrest : is
released.
XPull backrest : forward in the direction of
the arrow, or push it back and let it engage.
XTo ensure that the backrest has engaged,
lean firmly against backrest :.
iThe angle and fore/aft position of the left
and right rear seats can be separately
adjusted for each seat in order to make
better use of the cargo compartment.
242 Stowage areas
Stowage and features
Depending on the angle of the backrest,
therefore, the right and left rear seats can
be pushed back varying distances until the
backrest is resting against the cargo
compartment cover.
If the backrest comes into contact with
surrounding parts of the cargo
compartment paneling, reduce the angle of
the backrest.
Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft position
! When moving the rear seats back, make
sure there are no objects in the footwell or
behind the seats. The rear seats and/or the
objects could otherwise be damaged.
XLift the left or right release handle and slide
the corresponding seat forwards or
backwards.
XLet go of the release handle again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position.
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings
Observe the following notes on securing
loads:
RObserve the loading guidelines
(Y page 236).
RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges
or corners.
RPad sharp edges for protection.
There are four cargo tie-down rings in the
cargo compartment.
:Cargo tie-down rings
Bag hook
GWARNING
The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects
or items of luggage. Objects or items of
luggage could be flung around and thereby hit
vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly
changing directions. There is a risk of injury.
Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.
Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile
objects on the bag hooks.
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load
of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to
secure a load.
There is one bag hook on either side of the
cargo compartment.
Stowage areas 243
Stowage and features
Z
:Bag hook
Cargo compartment cover
Important safety notes
GWARNING
On its own, the cargo compartment cover
cannot secure or restrain heavy objects,
items of luggage and heavy loads. You could
be hit by an unsecured load during sudden
changes in direction, braking or in the event
of an accident. There is an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo compartment cover.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that
you do not stack the load in the cargo
compartment higher than the lower edge of
the side windows. Do not place heavy
objects on top of the cargo compartment
cover.
! When removing and installing the cargo
compartment cover, ensure that its end
caps do not scrape the light-colored parts
of the vehicle.
The cargo compartment cover is located
behind the rear bench seat backrest.
Extending/retracting the cargo
compartment cover
XTo extend: pull the cargo compartment
cover back by grab handle : and clip it
into retainers ; on the left and right.
XTo retract: unhook the cargo compartment
cover from retainers ; on the left and right
and guide it forwards by grab handle :
until it is fully retracted.
Installing/removing the cargo
compartment cover
XTo remove: make sure that the cargo
compartment cover is rolled up.
XPush in the end cap of cargo compartment
cover : in the direction of the arrow on
the right or left side using grip =.
XPush cargo compartment cover : into
opposite anchorage ;.
XRemove cargo compartment cover :
upwards.
244 Stowage areas
Stowage and features
XTo install: set cargo compartment
cover : on the right or left-hand side in
anchorage ;.
XPush in the opposite end cap of cargo
compartment cover : in the direction of
the arrow and insert cargo compartment
cover : into opposite anchorage ;.
Cargo net
Important safety notes
GWARNING
On its own, the cargo net cannot secure or
restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and
heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured
load during sudden changes in direction,
braking or in the event of an accident. There
is an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by
using tie downs, even if you are using the
cargo net.
It is important to use a cargo net if you load
the vehicle with small objects above the seat
backrests. For safety reasons, always use a
cargo net when transporting loads.
The cargo net is located in the stowage space
under the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 245).
XOpen both Velcro fasteners and remove the
cargo net.
XUnroll and unfold the cargo net.
The joints on the upper and lower guide rod
should engage audibly.
The corresponding cargo tie down rings for
tightening the cargo net are in the cargo
compartment (Y page 243).
Attaching and tightening the cargo net
XTo attach and tighten: insert guide
rod : into bracket ;.
XAttach belt hook ? to the cargo tie-down
ring and pull down on the loose end of the
lashing strap until the cargo net is taut.
XAfter driving a short distance, check the
tension of the cargo net and retighten it if
necessary.
XTo loosen and detach: pull belt clamp
= up to reduce the tension in the lashing
strap.
XUnhook belt hook ? from the cargo tie-
down ring.
XDetach guide rod : from bracket ;.
XTo stow: press the red button on the upper
and lower guide rod.
XFold the cargo net and roll it up.
XClose the two Velcro fasteners on the cargo
net holder.
Stowage well under the cargo
compartment floor
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you drive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around, thus
striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Stowage areas 245
Stowage and features
Z
Always close the cargo compartment floor
before a journey.
! The maximum load capacity of the
stowage well under the cargo compartment
floor is 55 lbs (25 kg).
Opening/closing the cargo
compartment floor
A bracket for TIREFIT, the vehicle tool kit, etc.
is located underneath the cargo
compartment floor.
XTo open: open the tailgate.
XPress down handle : on ribbing ;.
Handle : folds up.
XSwing the cargo compartment floor
upwards using handle : until it rests
against the cargo compartment cover.
XFold out hook = on the underside of the
cargo compartment floor.
XAttach hook = to the cargo
compartment's upper seal ?.
XTo close: detach hook = from seal ?.
XFasten hook = to the bracket on the
underside of the cargo compartment floor.
XFold the trunk floor down.
XPress the trunk floor down until it engages.
Setting the height of the trunk floor
The stowage well under the cargo
compartment floor can be increased or
decreased in size as necessary. To do this,
you can lock the floor at two different heights.
The upper catch gives a flat load surface when
the rear bench seat is folded forward.
246 Stowage areas
Stowage and features
XTo raise: using handle :, lift up cargo
compartment floor ; in the direction of
arrow = and pull it upwards.
XLower cargo compartment floor ; again.
To do this, push the trunk floor away so that
it engages in the guide on the upper level.
Cargo compartment floor ; engages in
the upper position.
iCarry out this step using both hands.
XTo lower: raise cargo compartment
floor ; slightly using handle : and pull it
towards you.
XLower cargo compartment floor ; again
slowly. Whilst doing so, press the trunk
floor into the lower level.
Cargo compartment floor ; engages in
the lower position.
Roof carrier
Important safety notes
GWARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving
characteristics change. If you exceed the
maximum roof load, the driving
characteristics, as well as steering and
braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and
adjust your driving style.
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
This helps to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
Position the load on the roof rack in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain
damage even when it is in motion.
Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's
equipment, you can raise the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel fully and
open the tailgate fully when the roof carrier
is installed.
The maximum roof load is 165 lbs((75 kg).
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof
load may become detached from the vehicle.
You must therefore ensure that you observe
the roof carrier manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Attaching the roof carrier
XOpen covers : carefully in the direction of
the arrow.
XFold covers : upwards.
XOnly secure the roof carrier to the
anchorage points under covers :.
XObserve the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
GWARNING
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
whilst traveling. If you use a cup holder whilst
traveling, the container may be flung around
and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle
occupants may come into contact with the
liquid and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You
may be distracted from the traffic conditions
and you could lose control of the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Features 247
Stowage and features
Z
Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is
stationary. Only use the cup holder for
containers of the right size. Always close the
container, particularly if the liquid is hot.
GWARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
RAlways make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets
or stowage nets.
RClose the lockable stowage spaces while
driving.
RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too
large in the cargo compartment.
! Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill.
The stowage compartments in the doors
provide space for bottles:
Rfront: capacity up to 51 fl. oz. (1.5 l)
Rrear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l)
Cup holder in the front-compartment
center console
The cup holder and the rubber mat
underneath can be removed for cleaning.
Clean them with clean, lukewarm water only.
XTo remove: carefully pull in upper sections
of cup holder : on the driver's and front-
passenger sides until they release.
XLift the cup holder upwards ; until it can
be removed.
XTo install: insert the cup holder into lateral
curved sections ; in the stowage
compartment. Insert the cup holder so that
the wedge of the upper section of cup
holder : faces forwards.
XPress the cup holder downwards until it
engages on the right and left-hand sides.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup
holder could be damaged.
248 Features
Stowage and features
XFold down the rear seat armrest.
XTo open: press the front of cup holder :
or ;.
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
XTo close: slide cup holder : or ; back
until it engages.
Sun visors
Overview
GWARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
:Mirror light
;Bracket
=Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
?Vanity mirror
AMirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover
A has been folded up.
Glare from the side
XFold down the sun visor.
XPull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
XSwing the sun visor to the side.
XVehicles with mirror lights: slide the sun
visor horizontally as desired.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
! The stowage space under the ashtray is
not heat resistant. Before placing lit
cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that
the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise,
the stowage space could be damaged.
Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowage
compartment
XTo open: push the lower section of
cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
XTo remove the insert: lift insert =
up ; and out.
XTo re-install the insert: press insert =
into the holder until it engages.
Features 249
Stowage and features
Z
iIf you remove the ashtray insert, you can
use the resulting compartment for
stowage.
Rear-compartment ashtray
XTo open: pull cover = out by its top edge.
XTo remove: pull insert ; by recess : in
the direction of arrow ? until it audibly
releases.
XLift insert ; up and out.
XTo install the insert: place insert ; from
above into the holder and press down until
it engages.
Cigarette lighter
GWARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls
Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
lighter when road and traffic conditions
permit.
Example: vehicles with a cover over the stowage
compartment
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
XTo open: push the lower section of
cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
XPress in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
automatically when the heating element is
red-hot.
12 V sockets
Points to observe before use
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).
Accessories include such items as lamps or
chargers for mobile phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the battery may
discharge.
iAn emergency cut-out ensures that the
on-board voltage does not drop too low. If
the on-board voltage is too low, the power
to the sockets is automatically cut. This
ensures that there is sufficient power to
start the engine.
250 Features
Stowage and features
Socket in the front-compartment center
console
Vehicles with a cover over the stowage
compartment
XTo open: push the lower section of
cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
XLift up the cover of socket ;.
Vehicles without a cover over the stowage
compartment
XLift up the cover of socket :.
Socket in the rear-compartment center
console
XPull cover : out by its top edge.
XLift up the cover of socket ;.
Socket in the cargo compartment
XLift up the cover of socket :.
mbrace
Important safety notes
! You must have a license agreement to
activate the mbrace service. Make sure
that your system is activated and ready for
use. To register, press the ï MB Info call
button. If any of the steps mentioned are
not carried out, the system may not be
activated.
Features 251
Stowage and features
Z
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone
hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Shortly after successfully registering with the
mbrace service (Canada: TELEAID), a user ID
and password will be sent to you by post. USA
only: you can use this password to log onto
the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
The mbrace system is available if:
Rit has been activated and is operational
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network
is available for transmitting data to the
Customer Center
Ra service subscription is available
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged
iDetermining the location of the vehicle on
a map is only possible if:
RGPS reception is available.
Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to
the Customer Assistance Center.
The mbrace system
To adjust the volume during an mbrace call,
proceed as follows:
XPress the W or X button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
XUse the volume controller of the audio
system/COMAND.
The mbrace system provides various
services, e.g.:
Rautomatic and manual emergency call
RRoadside Assistance call
RMB Info call
USA only: you can find information and a
description of all available features under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
System self-test
After you have switched on the ignition, the
system carries out a self-diagnosis.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if one of the following occurs:
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
not come on during the system self-test.
RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistance button does not light up during
self-diagnosis of the system.
RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
button does not light up during self-
diagnosis of the system.
RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the
following buttons continues to light up red
after the system self-diagnosis:
-SOS button
-the F Roadside Assistance call
button
-the ï MB Info call button
RThe mbrace Inoperative or mbrace
Service Not Activated message
appears in the multifunction display after
the system self-diagnosis.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as
expected. In the event of an emergency, help
will have to be summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
the following service hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
252 Features
Stowage and features
Emergency call
Important safety notes
! You must have a license agreement to
activate the mbrace service. Make sure
that your system is activated and ready for
use. To register, press the ï MB Info call
button. If any of the steps mentioned are
not carried out, the system may not be
activated.
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone
hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
General notes
An emergency call is dialed automatically if
an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is
triggered.
iYou cannot end an automatically
triggered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually.
As soon as the emergency call has been
initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The Connecting Call message
appears in the multifunction display.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the
Call Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
All important information on the emergency
is transmitted, for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle (as
determined by the GPS system)
RVehicle identification number
RInformation on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been
initiated, a voice connection is automatically
established between the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle
occupants.
RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center attempts to get more information
on the emergency.
RIf there is no response from the vehicle
occupants, an ambulance is immediately
sent to the vehicle.
The mbrace system has not been able to
initiate an emergency call if no voice
connection to the Response Center has been
established. This can occur, for example, if
the relevant mobile phone network is not
available. The indicator lamp in the SOS
button flashes continuously.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display and must be confirmed.
In this case, seek assistance by other means.
Making an emergency call
GWARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
emergency if:
Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the
vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an
accident
Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of
road
Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
seen by other road users, particularly when
dark or in poor visibility conditions
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or
similar situations as soon as it is safe to do
so. Move to a safe location along with other
vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure
the vehicle in accordance with national
regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.
Features 253
Stowage and features
Z
XTo initiate an emergency call
manually: press cover : briefly to open.
XPress SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ;
flashes until the emergency call is
concluded.
XWait for a voice connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center.
XAfter the emergency call, close cover :.
iIf the mobile phone network is not
available, mbrace is not able to make an
emergency call. If you leave the vehicle
immediately after pressing the SOS button,
you do not know if mbrace has successfully
made the emergency call. In this situation,
seek additional assistance by other means.
Roadside Assistance button
XPress Roadside Assistance button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center. The indicator
lamp in Roadside Assistance button :
flashes while the call is active. The
Connecting Call message appears on
the multifunction display. The audio output
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call
Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
If a cellular phone network is available and
there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace
system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center, for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle
RVehicle identification number
iThe display of the audio system or
COMAND shows that an mbrace call is
active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
From the vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance center can ascertain the nature of
the problem (Y page 258).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-
Benz technician or arranges for your vehicle
to be transported to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged
for services such as repair work and/or
towing. Further details are available in your
mbrace manual.
iThe mbrace system failed to initiate a
Roadside Assistance call if:
Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside
Assistance call button : is flashing
continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
established.
This may be because the corresponding
mobile phone network is not available.
254 Features
Stowage and features
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
XTo end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
XPress the corresponding button for ending
a phone call on the audio system or on
COMAND.
MB Info call button
XPress MB Info call button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center. The indicator
lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while
the connection is being made. The
Connecting Call message appears on
the multifunction display. The audio system
is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call
Connected message appears in the
multifunction display.
If a cellular phone network is available and
there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace
system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center, for example:
RCurrent location of the vehicle
RVehicle identification number
iThe display of the audio system or
COMAND shows that an mbrace call is
active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available.
A voice connection is established between
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants. You can
obtain information on how to operate your
vehicle's systems, on the location of the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
and on further products and services offered
by Mercedes-Benz USA.
USA only: you can find further information on
the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
iThe mbrace system failed to initiate an
MB Info call if:
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call
button : is flashing continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
established.
This may be because the corresponding
mobile phone network is not available.
The Call Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
XTo end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
XPress the corresponding button for ending
a phone call on the audio system or on
COMAND.
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
call can still be initiated. In this case, an
emergency call will take priority and override
all other active calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended. An emergency
call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
Features 255
Stowage and features
Z
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
Rthe ~ button on the multifunction
steering wheel
Rthe corresponding button on the audio
system or on COMAND for ending a
telephone call
iIf an mbrace call is initiated, audio output
is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
connected to COMAND. However, if you
would like to use your mobile phone, do so
only when the vehicle is stationary and in a
safe location.
Downloading destinations in COMAND
Downloading destinations
Destination Download gives you access to a
data bank with over 15 million Points of
Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on
the navigation system in your vehicle. If you
know the destination, the address can be
downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the
location of Points of Interest (POIs)/
important destinations in the vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with
up to 20 way points.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance
to the address entered.
The system calculates the route and
subsequently starts the route guidance with
the address entered.
iIf you select No, the address can be stored
in the address book.
iThe Destination Download function is
available if the corresponding mobile
phone network is available and data
transfer is possible.
iYou can only use the Destination
Download function if the vehicle is
equipped with a navigation system.
Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS
Package and cannot be purchased
separately.
iYou can also use the Route Assistance
function if your vehicle is not equipped with
a navigation system.
Within the framework of this service, you
receive a professional and reliable form of
navigation support without having to leave
your vehicle.
The customer service representative finds a
suitable route depending on your vehicle's
current position and the desired destination.
You will then be guided live through the
current route section.
Search & Send
General notes
iTo use "Search & Send", your vehicle
must be equipped with mbrace and a
navigation system. You must also have an
mbrace service subscription.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry
service. A destination address which is found
on Google Maps® can be transferred via
mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation
system.
Specifying and sending the destination
address
XGo to the website http://
www.maps.google.com and enter a
destination address into the entry field.
XTo send the destination address to the
e-mail address of your mbrace
account: click on the corresponding
button.
iExample:
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address
will be sent to your vehicle.
XWhen the "Send" dialog window appears:
In the relevant field, enter the e-mail
address which you specified when
activating your mbrace account.
XClick "Send".
256 Features
Stowage and features
iInformation on specific commands such
as "Address entry" or "Sending" can be
found on the website.
Calling up destination addresses
XSwitch on the ignition.
The destination address is loaded into the
vehicle's navigation system.
A display message appears, asking
whether navigation should be started.
XSelect Yes by sliding XVY and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The system calculates the route and
subsequently starts the route guidance
with the address entered.
iIf you select No, the address can be stored
in the address book.
iIf you have sent more than one
destination address, each individual
destination must be confirmed separately.
iDestination addresses are loaded in the
same order as the order in which they were
sent. If you have multiple Mercedes-Benz
vehicles with mbrace and active mbrace
accounts:
if multiple vehicles are registered under the
same e-mail address, the destination will
be sent to all the vehicles.
Vehicle remote opening
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and
a replacement SmartKey is not available. The
vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately opened
remotely within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote opening
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days the vehicle can no longer be opened
remotely.
XContact the following service hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.
XReturn to your vehicle at the time agreed
upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
opened via:
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
section
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
Blackberry)
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
iVehicle remote opening is only possible if
the corresponding mobile phone network
is accessible.
Vehicle remote closing
The remote closing feature can be used when
you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you
are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be
locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely
locked within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote closing
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed
remotely.
XContact the following service hotlines:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your PIN.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and
you switch on the ignition, the Doors
Features 257
Stowage and features
Z
Locked Remotely message appears in the
multifunction display.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
locked via:
Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"
section
Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,
Blackberry)
To do this, you will need your identification
number and password.
iThe vehicle remote closing feature is
available when the relevant mobile phone
network is available and data connection is
possible.
Stolen vehicle recovery service
If your vehicle has been stolen:
XNotify the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
XThis number will be forwarded to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center together with your PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center then attempts to locate the mbrace
system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center contacts you and the
local law enforcement agency if the vehicle
is located. However, only the law
enforcement agency is informed of the
location of the vehicle.
iIf the anti-theft alarm system is activated
for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance center is
automatically informed.
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis
With the vehicle remote malfunction
diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the
Customer Assistance center can provide
improved support for problems with your
vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data
is transferred to the Customer Assistance
center. The customer service representative
can use the received data to decide what kind
of assistance is required. You are then, for
example, guided to the nearest Mercedes-
Benz Service center or a recovery vehicle is
called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during
an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,
this is initiated by the Customer Assistance
center. You will see the Roadside
Assistance Connected message in the
COMAND display. If the vehicle remote
malfunction diagnosis is able to be started,
the Request for vehicle diagnosis
received. Start vehicle diagnosis?
message appears in the display.
XPress Yes to confirm the message.
XIf the Vehicle Diagnosis: Please
switch on ignition. message appears:
turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
XIf the Please follow the
instructions received by phone and
move your vehicle to a safe
position. message appears: follow the
instructions of the customer service
representative.
The message in the display disappears.
If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote
malfunction diagnosis is canceled
completely.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosis
activated message appears.
When the check is finished, the Sending
vehicle diagnosis data...(Voice
connection may be interrupted
during data transfer.) message
appears. The vehicle data can now be sent to
the Customer Assistance center.
XPress OK to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance center is terminated.
The Vehicle Diagnosis:
Transferring data... appears.
258 Features
Stowage and features
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
Assistance center.
Depending on what the customer service
representative agreed with you, the voice
connection is re-established after the transfer
is complete. If necessary, you will be
contacted at a later time by another means,
e.g. by E-Mail or telephone.
Further functions of the vehicle remote
malfunction diagnosis include, for example:
Rtransfer of service data to the Customer
Assistance center. If a service is overdue,
the COMAND display shows a message
about various special offers at your
workshop.
Rmonthly status information E-Mail on oil
level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,
etc. If applicable, you will receive
information on special offers in the E-Mail.
USA only: this information can also be
called up under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle
(Y page 25).
Information on roadside assistance
(Y page 22).
Downloading routes
Downloading routes allows you to transfer
and save predefined routes in the navigation
system. To do this, an SD memory card must
be inserted into the COMAND system. If no
SD memory card is inserted, you must insert
the card into the card slot on the COMAND
system before saving.
A route can be prepared and sent either by a
customer service representative or via the
mbrace portal on the Internet. Each route can
include up to 20 way points. When a route has
been received by the navigation system, the
'Route name' has been saved to
memory card. Do you want to start
route guidance? message appears on the
COMAND display. The route is saved to the
SD memory card.
XTo start route guidance: select Yes.
An overview of the route is shown in the
display.
iIf you select No, the saved route can be
called up later in the navigation menu.
XSelect Start.
Route guidance is started.
iDownloaded and saved data can be called
up again in COMAND.
You can find further information in the
separate COMAND operating instructions.
Speed alert
You can define the upper speed limit, which
must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this
selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a
message will be sent to the Customer
Assistance center. The Customer Assistance
center then forwards this information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive
this information beforehand. Possible options
include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.
The data which is sent to the Customer
Assistance center contains the following
information:
Rthe location where the speed limit was
exceeded
Rthe time at which the speed limit was
exceeded
Rthe selected speed limit which was
exceeded
Geo fencing
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which
the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will
be informed if the vehicle crosses the
boundaries of the selected areas. You can
select the way in which you receive this
information beforehand. Possible options
include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.
The area can be determined as either a circle
or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.
You can specify up to ten areas
Features 259
Stowage and features
Z
simultaneously. Different settings are
possible for each area.
USA only: these settings can be called up
under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call
and inform the customer service
representative that you wish to activate geo
fencing.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by
SMS.
Triggering the vehicle alarm
With this function, you can trigger the
vehicle's panic alarm via SMS. An alarm
sounds and the exterior lighting flashes.
Depending on the setting, the panic alarm
lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the
alarm switches off.
Garage door opener
Important safety notes
GWARNING
When you operate or program the garage door
with the integrated garage door opener,
persons in the range of movement of the
garage door can become trapped or struck by
the garage door. There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage
door.
GWARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces
without sufficient ventilation.
The HomeLink® garage door opener
integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you
to operate up to three different door and gate
systems.
Only operate garage doors using the
integrated garage door opener if:
Rthey are equipped with a safety stop and
reverse feature, and
Rthey conform to the current U.S. safety
standards.
When programming a garage door opener,
park vehicle outside the garage.
iCertain garage door drives are
incompatible with the integrated garage
door opener. If you have difficulty
programming the integrated garage door
opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following
telephone assistance services:
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
RCanada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515
(free of charge)
More information on HomeLink® and/or
compatible products is also available
online at http://www.homelink.com.
iNotes on the declaration of conformity
(Y page 23).
Programming
Programming buttons
Observe the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 260).
260 Features
Stowage and features
Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view
mirror
Garage door remote control A is not part of
the integrated garage door opener.
XThe first time before programming, clear
the integrated garage door opener memory
(Y page 263).
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
the integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow.
iIndicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon
as button ;, = or ? is programmed for
the first time. If the selected button has
already been programmed, indicator
lamp : will only light up yellow after ten
seconds have elapsed.
XRelease button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
XPoint garage door remote control A
towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view
mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to
20 cm).
iThe required distance between remote
control A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be
necessary. You should test every position
for at least 25 seconds before trying
another position.
XPress and hold button B on remote control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
If indicator lamp : lights up green or
flashes, then programming has been
successful.
XRelease button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
XIf indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat
the programming procedure for the
corresponding button on the rear-view
mirror. When doing so, vary the distance
between remote control A and the rear-
view mirror.
iIf the indicator lamp flashes green after
successful programming, the garage door
system is using a rolling code. After
programming, you must synchronize the
garage door opener integrated in the rear-
view mirror with the receiver of the garage
door system.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Observe the "Important safety notes"
(Y page 260).
Your vehicle must be within reach of the
garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
objects are present within the sweep of the
door or gate.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress the program button of the door or
gate drive (see the door or gate drive
operating instructions, e.g. under
"programming of additional remote
controls").
iUsually, you now have 30seconds to
initiate the next step.
XPress previously programmed button ;,
= or ? of the integrated garage door
opener until the door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then
complete.
Features 261
Stowage and features
Z
Notes on programming the remote
control
Canadian radio frequency laws require a
"break" (or interruption) of the transmission
signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
Therefore, these signals may not last long
enough for the integrated garage door
opener. The signal is not recognized during
programming. Comparable with Canadian
law, some U.S. garage door openers also
feature a "break".
Proceed as follows:
Rif you live in Canada
Rif you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where
you live) when using the programming
steps
XPress and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
the integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow.
XRelease the button.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
XPress button B of garage door remote
control A for two seconds, then release it
for two seconds.
XPress button B again for two seconds.
XRepeat this sequence on button B of
remote control A until indicator lamp :
lights up green.
If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the
process.
XContinue with the other programming
steps (see above).
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems
programming the integrated garage door
opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of
the following instructions:
RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage
door drive remote control A. This can
usually be found on the back of the remote
control.
The integrated garage door opener is
compatible with devices that have units
which operate in the frequency range of
280to 433MHz.
RReplace the batteries in garage door
remote control A. This increases the
likelihood that garage door remote control
A will transmit a strong and precise signal
to the integrated garage door opener in the
rear-view mirror.
RWhen programming, hold remote control
A at varying distances and angles from the
button that you are programming. Try
various angles at a distance between 2and
12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle
but at varying distances.
RIf another remote control for the same
garage door drive is available, repeat the
same programming steps with this remote
control. Before performing these steps,
make sure that new batteries have been
installed in garage door drive remote
control A.
RNote that some remote controls only
transmit for a limited amount of time (the
indicator lamp on the remote control goes
out). Press button B on remote control
A again before transmission ends.
RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal
reception/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of
the garage door system remote control.
Please also read the operating instructions
for the garage door system.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress button ;, = or ? which you have
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code:
indicator lamp : lights up green.
262 Features
Stowage and features
Garage door system with a rolling code:
indicator lamp : flashes green.
iThe transmitter will transmit a signal as
long as the button is pressed. The
transmission is halted after a maximum of
ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights
up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again
if necessary.
Clearing the memory
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XPress buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
XPress and hold buttons ; and ? until the
indicator lamp turns green.
iMake sure that you clear the memory of
the integrated garage door opener before
selling the vehicle.
Compass
Calling up the compass
The compass displays in which compass
direction the vehicle is currently traveling: N,
NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.
To receive a correct display in rear-view
mirror :, the compass must be calibrated
and the magnetic field zone set.
Setting the compass
XDetermine your position using the following
zone maps.
North America zone map
South America zone map
Features 263
Stowage and features
Z
XPush a round pen into opening
=(Y page 263) for approximately three
seconds.
The zone currently selected appears in
compass display ;(Y page 263).
XTo select the zone: push a round pen into
opening =(Y page 263) until the desired
zone is selected.
If, after a few seconds, the display in
compass display ;(Y page 263) changes
direction, the zone has been selected.
Calibrating the compass
XMake sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding
traffic.
In order to calibrate the compass correctly,
do the following:
Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not
in the vicinity of steel structures or high-
voltage transmission lines.
Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear
window defroster.
Rclose all doors and the tailgate.
XSwitch on the ignition.
XPush a round pen into opening
=(Y page 263) for approximately six
seconds, until symbol C is shown in
compass display ;(Y page 263).
XDrive your vehicle in a full circle at
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph
(10 km/h).
When the calibration has successfully been
completed, the current direction is shown
in compass display ;(Y page 263).
Floormat on the driver's side
GWARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle
is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats.
XSlide the seat backwards.
XTo install: place the floormat in the
footwell.
XPress safety catch knobs : onto
retainers ;.
XTo remove: pull the floormat off
retainers ;.
XRemove the floormat.
264 Features
Stowage and features
Useful information ............................ 266
Engine compartment ........................ 266
Maintenance ...................................... 270
Care .................................................... 271
265
Maintenance and care
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving.
GWARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
a risk of injury to persons within range of
movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one is
within its range of movement.
GWARNING
Certain components in the engine
compartment, such as the engine, radiator
and parts of the exhaust system, can become
very hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses a risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
GWARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is
overheated or when there is a fire in the
engine compartment could expose you to hot
gases or other service products. There is a
risk of injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
GWARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment,
Rswitch off the ignition
Rnever reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
Rkeep clothing away from moving parts
GWARNING
The ignition system and the fuel injection
system work under high voltage. If you touch
components which are under voltage, you
could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
injury.
Never touch components of the ignition
system or fuel injection system when the
ignition is switched on.
Opening the hood
GWARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
266 Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield
wipers or the hood.
XMake sure that the windshield wipers are
switched off.
XPull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
XReach into the gap between the hood and
the radiator trim and press hood catch
lever ; to the left.
XRaise the hood.
XPull support strut ? out of bracket A.
XLift up support strut ? and insert it into
yellow retaining clip =.
Closing the hood
XRaise the hood slightly and, at the same
time, remove support strut ? from yellow
retaining clip =.
XSwing support strut ? down and press it
into bracket A until it engages.
XLower the hood and let it fall from a height
of approximately 8 in (20 cm).
XCheck that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Do not press the hood
closed. Open the hood again and close it
with a little more force.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on the driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil
over a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). The
oil consumption may be higher than this when
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may
be in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.
Rthe engine should be switched off for
approximately five minutes if the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Rif the engine is not at normal operating
temperature, e.g. if the engine was only
started briefly: wait about 30 minutes
before carrying out the measurement.
Engine compartment 267
Maintenance and care
Z
Checking the oil level using the oil
dipstick
Example
XPull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
tube.
XWipe off oil dipstick :.
XSlowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
tube to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and
MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
XIf the oil level has dropped to MIN mark
= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
engine oil.
Adding engine oil
GWARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next
to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down
and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the
components before starting the engine.
HEnvironmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful
to the environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that
have been approved for vehicles with a
service system. You can obtain a list of the
engine oils and oil filters tested and
approved in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service
center.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
caused by the following:
Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have
not been specifically approved for the
service system
Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after
the interval for replacement specified by
the service system has been exceeded
Rusing engine oil additives.
! Do not add too much oil. adding too much
engine oil can result in damage to the
engine or to the catalytic converter. Have
excess engine oil siphoned off.
Example: engine oil cap
XTurn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
it.
XAdd engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark
on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)
of engine oil.
XReplace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place
securely.
XCheck the oil level again with the oil
dipstick (Y page 268).
Further information on engine oil
(Y page 332).
268 Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
Checking and adding other service
products
Checking coolant level
GWARNING
The engine cooling system is pressurized,
particularly when the engine is warm. When
opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot
coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before opening the
cap. Wear eye and hand protection when
opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a
turn to allow pressure to escape.
! The coolant may only be checked and
corrected when the engine is cool (coolant
temperature below 104 ‡ (40 †).
Checking the coolant when the coolant
temperature is above 104 ‡ (40 †) may
result in damage to the engine or to the
engine cooling system.
Example
XPark the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the
vehicle is on a level surface and the engine
has cooled down.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
XCheck the coolant temperature display in
the instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below
104 ‡ (40 †).
XTurn the SmartKey to position
0 (Y page 135) in the ignition lock.
XSlowly turn cap : half a turn counter-
clockwise to allow excess pressure to
escape.
XTurn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
= in the filler neck when cold, there is
enough coolant in coolant expansion
tank ;.
XIf necessary, add coolant that has been
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
XReplace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 333).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer system/headlamp cleaning
system
GWARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot
engine components or the exhaust system it
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
Example
XTo open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
XAdd the premixed washer fluid.
XTo close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
Engine compartment 269
Maintenance and care
Z
The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the
windshield washer system and the headlamp
cleaning system.
The recommended minimum amount when
topping up is 1 liter. If the water level drops
below this, a message appears in the
multifunction display prompting you to refill
the washer fluid (Y page 223).
Further information on windshield washer
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 334).
Maintenance
ASSYST PLUS
Service messages
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate Maintenance
Booklet).
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
iThe ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (Y page 267).
The multifunction display shows a service
message for several seconds, e.g.:
RNext Service A in .. Days
RService A Due
RService A Exceeded by .. Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed.
The letter A or B, possibly in connection with
a number or another letter, shows the type of
service. A stands for a minor service and B for
a major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not take into account any periods of
time during which the battery is
disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service
schedule:
XNote down the service due date displayed
in the multifunction display before
disconnecting the battery.
or
XAfter reconnecting the battery, subtract
the battery disconnection periods from the
service date shown on the display.
Hiding a service message
XPress % or a.
Displaying service messages
XSwitch on the ignition.
XUsing = or ;, select the Serv.
menu.
XPress 9 or : to select the ASSYST
PLUS submenu and press a to confirm.
The service due date appears in the
multifunction display.
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
interval display
! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval
display has been inadvertently reset, this
setting can be corrected at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described
in the Maintenance Booklet. This may
otherwise lead to increased wear and
damage to the major assemblies or the
vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset
the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
after the service work has been carried out.
You can also obtain further information on
maintenance work, for example.
270 Maintenance
Maintenance and care
Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
account. Under arduous operating conditions
or increased load on the vehicle,
maintenance work must be carried out more
frequently, for example:
Rregular city driving with frequent
intermediate stops
Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel
short distances
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
Rif the engine is often left idling for long
periods
Under these or similar conditions, have, for
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under
arduous operating conditions, the tires must
be checked more often. Further information
can be obtained at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
is also available in other countries. You can
obtain further information from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Care
General notes
HEnvironmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible
manner.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
of the following:
Rdry, rough or hard cloths
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rsolvents
Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective
films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
damage the surfaces and protective film.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.
The vehicle can then be parked.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Exterior care
Automatic car wash
GWARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes
automatically in certain situations. To
prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
Rwhen towing the vehicle
Rin the car wash
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
Care 271
Maintenance and care
Z
! Make sure that the automatic
transmission is in position N when washing
your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The
vehicle could be damaged if the
transmission is in another position.
! Make sure that:
Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
are fully closed.
Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off
(the OFF button has been pressed/the
airflow control is set to position 0).
Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position
0.
Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
wax from the windshield and the wiper
blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
wiping noises caused by residue on the
windshield.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at wash bays that are specially
designed for this purpose. Observe the legal
requirements in all countries concerned.
XDo not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
XUse a soft sponge to clean.
XUse a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
XThoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
gentle jet of water.
XDo not point the water jet directly towards
the air inlet.
XUse plenty of water and rinse out the
sponge frequently.
XRinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois.
XDo not let the cleaning agent dry on the
paintwork.
When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
soon as possible.
Power washers
GWARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced
immediately.
! Always maintain a distance of at least
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
power washer nozzle. Information about
the correct distance is available from the
equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around
when cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
Rtires
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
Relectrical components
Rbattery
Rconnectors
Rlights
Rseals
Rtrim
Rventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures.
272 Care
Maintenance and care
Cleaning the wheels
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.
The vehicle can then be parked.
Cleaning the paintwork
! Do not affix:
Rstickers
Rfilms
Rmagnetic plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
XRemove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
XSoak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
XSoak bird droppings with water and rinse
off the treated areas afterwards.
XRemove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
lighter fluid.
XUse tar remover to remove tar stains.
XUse silicone remover to remove wax.
XUse a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to
the paintwork quickly and provisionally.
The following cannot always be completely
repaired:
Rscratches
Rcorrosive deposits
Rareas affected by corrosion
Rdamage caused by inadequate care
In such cases, visit a qualified specialist
workshop.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz. This is the case approximately every
three to five months, depending on the
climate conditions and the care product used.
If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface or
if the paintwork has become dull, then the
paintwork should be cleaned. For cleaning,
please use the paint cleaner recommend and
approved by Mercedes Benz.
Do not use these care products in the sun or
on the hood while the hood is hot.
Matte finish care
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to
shine.
! The following may cause the paint to
become shiny and thus reduce the matte
effect:
RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable
materials.
RFrequent use of car washes.
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or
polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.
wax. These products are only suitable for
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles
with matte finish leads to considerable
surface damage (shiny, spotted areas).
Always have paintwork repairs carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
treatment under any circumstances.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a
clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid
damage to the paintwork due to incorrect
treatment.
Care 273
Maintenance and care
Z
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
with a clear matte finish.
iThe vehicle should preferably be washed
by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo
and plenty of water.
iUse only insect remover and car shampoo
from the range of recommended and
approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Cleaning the windows
GWARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise,
you will damage the hood.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing
solvents to clean the inside of the windows.
Do not touch the insides of the windows
with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or
ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging
the windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
and pollen may under certain
circumstances prevent water from draining
away. This can lead to corrosion damage
and damage to electronic components.
XClean the inside and outside of the
windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
product that is recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning wiper blades
GWARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from
the windshield when vertical. Otherwise,
you will damage the hood.
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,
the wiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
graphite coating could be damaged. This
could cause wiper noise.
XFold the windshield wiper arms away from
the windshield.
XCarefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth.
XFold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths which are suitable for plastic light
lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage
the plastic light lenses.
XClean the plastic lenses of the exterior
lighting using a wet sponge and a mild
cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car
shampoo or cleaning cloths.
274 Care
Maintenance and care
Cleaning the mirror turn signals
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths could scratch or damage the plastic
lenses of the mirror turn signals.
XClean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn
signals in the exterior mirror housing using
a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,
e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
Cleaning the sensors
! If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a
distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between
the vehicle and the power washer nozzle.
Information about the correct distance is
available from the equipment
manufacturer.
XClean sensors : of the driving systems
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera
! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with a power
washer.
XUse clear water and a soft cloth to clean
camera lens :.
Cleaning the exhaust pipe
! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
based cleaning agents such as sanitary
cleansers or wheel cleaners.
XClean the exhaust pipe with a care product
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in
winter and after washing.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
! For cleaning, do not use any of the
following:
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household
cleaning agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface
when cleaning. This could lead to
irreparable damage to the display.
Care 275
Maintenance and care
Z
XBefore cleaning the display, make sure that
it is switched off and has cooled down.
XClean the display surface using a
commercially available microfiber cloth
and TFT/LCD display cleaner.
XDry the display surface using a dry
microfiber cloth.
Cleaning the plastic trim
GWARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag
deployment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.
! Do not affix the following to plastic
surfaces:
Rstickers
Rfilms
Rscented oil bottles or similar items
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent
or sunscreen to come into contact with the
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
look of the surfaces.
XWipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
XHeavy soiling: use care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
XThoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim
elements
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners,
polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk
of damaging the surface.
! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and
can lose their shine if chrome polish is
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead
when cleaning the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you
are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
are chrome-plated or not, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
XWipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
cloth.
XHeavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean
genuine leather, artificial leather or
Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can
damage the cover.
iNote that regular care is essential to
ensure that the appearance and comfort of
the covers is retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers
Leather is a natural product.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
RDifferences in the texture
RSigns of stretching and marking
RSlight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.
276 Care
Maintenance and care
! To retain the natural appearance of the
leather, observe the following cleaning
instructions:
RClean genuine leather covers carefully
with a damp cloth and then wipe the
covers down with a dry cloth.
RMake sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise
become rough and cracked.
ROnly use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz. You can obtain these from a
qualified specialist workshop.
Seat covers of other materials
! Observe the following when cleaning:
RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing
1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
RClean cloth covers with a microfiber
cloth moistened with a solution
containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish
washing liquid). Rub carefully and always
wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving
visible lines. Leave the seat to dry
afterwards. Cleaning results depend on
the type of dirt and how long it has been
there.
RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire
seat sections to avoid leaving visible
lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
GWARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event
of an accident. This poses an increased risk
of injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡
(80 †) or in direct sunlight.
XUse clean, lukewarm water and soap
solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
XHeadliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush
or a cleaning agent recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
XCarpets: use the carpet and textile
cleaning agents recommended and
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Care 277
Maintenance and care
Z
278
Useful information ............................ 280
Where will I find...? ........................... 280
Flat tire .............................................. 281
Battery (vehicle) ................................ 285
Jump-starting .................................... 289
Towing and tow-starting .................. 291
Fuses .................................................. 294
279
Breakdown assistance
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
Where will I find...?
First-aid kit
XOpen the tailgate.
XTo open the stowage compartment: turn
rotary knob : clockwise and fold down
cover ;.
XRemove first-aid kit =.
iCheck the expiration date on first-aid kit
= at least once a year. Replace the
contents if necessary, and replace missing
items.
Vehicle tool kit
General notes
Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit
is in the stowage well beneath the cargo
compartment floor.
Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit: the tire-
change tool kit is in the stowage well beneath
the cargo compartment floor.
iApart from certain country-specific
variations, the vehicles are not equipped
with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for
changing a wheel are specific to the
vehicle. For more information on which
tools are required and approved to perform
a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a
qualified specialist workshop.
Tools required for changing a wheel may
include, for example:
RJack
RWheel chock
RLug wrench
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit
:Tire inflation compressor
;Towing eye
=Tire sealant filler bottle
280 Where will I find...?
Breakdown assistance
XOpen the tailgate.
XLift the cargo compartment floor up
(Y page 246).
iTowing eye ; is located under tire
inflation compressor :.
Vehicles with a tire-change tool kit
XOpen the tailgate.
XLift the cargo compartment floor up
(Y page 246).
XRemove the tire-change tool kit.
The tire-change tool kit contains:
RJack
RLug wrench
ROne pair of gloves
RFolding wheel chock
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties) (Y page 281)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
vehicles with MOExtended tires.
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 280)
Information on changing/mounting a wheel
(Y page 319).
XStop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
XSwitch on the hazard warning lamps.
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 149).
XIf possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
XSwitch off the engine.
XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
XAll occupants must get out of the vehicle.
Make sure that they are not endangered as
they do so.
XMake sure that no one is near the danger
area while a wheel is being changed.
Anyone who is not directly assisting in the
wheel change should, for example, stand
behind the barrier.
XGet out of the vehicle. Pay attention to
traffic conditions when doing so.
XClose the driver's door.
iVehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
factory. It is therefore recommended that
you additionally equip your vehicle with a
TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a
qualified specialist workshop.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires. The affected
tire must not show any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-
bearing capacity and the speed index
(Y page 313).
MOExtended tires may only be used in
conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system.
If the pressure loss warning message
appears in the multifunction display:
RObserve the instructions in the display
messages (Y page 219).
RCheck the tire for damage.
RIf driving on, observe the following notes.
Flat tire 281
Breakdown assistance
The maximum driving distance is
approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the
vehicle is partially laden and approximately
18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully
laden.
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving
distance possible depends upon:
RSpeed
RRoad condition
ROutside temperature
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving
conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased
through a moderate style of driving.
The maximum permissible distance which
can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
the moment the tire pressure loss warning
appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
iWhen replacing one or all tires, make sure
that you use only tires:
Rof the size specified for the vehicle and
Rmarked "MOExtended"
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be
replaced with a MOExtended tire, a
standard tire may be used as a temporary
measure. Make sure that you use the
proper size and type (summer or winter
tire).
iVehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
factory. It is therefore recommended that
you additionally equip your vehicle with a
TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a
qualified specialist workshop.
Important safety notes
GWARNING
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when
cornering, accelerating quickly and when
braking. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
Ryou hear banging noises.
Rthe vehicle starts to shake.
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.
RESP® is intervening constantly.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in emergency mode, have the
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
workshop with regard to their further use. The
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes
GWARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown
assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire
properly:
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
than those mentioned above.
Rthe wheel rim is damaged.
Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures
or on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
GWARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes
irritation. It must not come into contact with
your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed.
Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant
away from children. There is a risk of injury.
282 Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them
thoroughly with clean water.
RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
Using the TIREFIT kit
TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up
to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside
temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
TIREFIT sticker, 2-part
XDo not remove any foreign objects which
have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or
nails.
XRemove the tire sealant bottle, the
accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire
inflation compressor from the stowage well
underneath the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 280).
XAffix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within
the driver's field of vision.
XAffix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
XRemove filler hose B and plug = from the
bottom section of the tire inflation
compressor housing.
XSlide the yellow filler hose connector into
the mounting on yellow cap A of tire
sealant bottle : until the plug engages.
XWith the sealing rings in front, slide yellow
cap A of tire sealant bottle : into the
mounting of tire inflation compressor ;
until the cap and both hooks engage.
XRemove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire.
XScrew filler hose D onto valve.
XInsert plug = into the socket of the
cigarette lighter (Y page 250) or into a 12 V
power socket in your vehicle (Y page 250).
XTurn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
ignition lock (Y page 135).
Flat tire 283
Breakdown assistance
Z
XPress on/off switch ? on the tire inflation
compressor to ON.
The tire inflation compressor is switched
on. The tire is inflated.
iFirst, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.
The pressure can briefly rise to
approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation
compressor during this phase.
XLet the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should
then have attained a pressure of at least
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
! Do not operate the tire inflation
compressor for longer than ten minutes at
a time without a break. It may otherwise
overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be
operated again once it has cooled down.
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
been attained after a maximum of after ten
minutes, see (Y page 284).
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
not been attained after a maximum of ten
minutes, see (Y page 284).
iIf tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It
can then be removed like a layer of film.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,
have them cleaned with perchloroethylene
at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.
Tire pressure not reached
If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has
not been achieved after ten minutes:
XSwitch off the tire inflation compressor.
XUnscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tire.
XVery slowly drive forwards or reverse
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
XPump up the tire again.
After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire
pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
GWARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving
characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Tire pressure reached
GWARNING
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
the specified maximum speed with a tire that
has been repaired using tire sealant.
! After use, excess tire sealant may run out
of the filler hose. This could cause stains.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.
HEnvironmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)
has been achieved after ten minutes:
XSwitch off the tire inflation compressor.
XUnscrew the filler hose from the valve of
the faulty tire.
XStow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
inflation compressor.
XPull away immediately.
The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire
sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part
of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the
instrument cluster in the driver's field of
vision.
284 Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
XStop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with
the tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
GWARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving
characteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
XCorrect the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (for the values,
see the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver's side B-pillar or tire
pressure table on the fuel filler flap).
XTo increase the tire pressure: switch on
the tire inflation compressor.
XTo reduce the tire pressure: depress
pressure release button : next to
pressure gauge ;.
XTo remove the tire sealant bottle from the
tire inflation compressor, press together
the locking tabs on the yellow cap.
XPull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire
inflation compressor.
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
sealant bottle.
XStow the tire sealant bottle and the tire
inflation compressor.
XDrive to the nearest qualified specialist
workshop and have the tire changed there.
XHave the tire sealant bottle and the filler
hose replaced as soon as possible at a
qualified specialist workshop.
XHave the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
Special tools and expert knowledge are
required when working on the battery, e.g.
removal and installing. You should therefore
have all work involving the battery carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
GWARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can, for example, lead to a short circuit and
damage your vehicle's electronic system. This
can disrupt driving safety systems such as
ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®
(Electronic Stability Program).
Battery (vehicle) 285
Breakdown assistance
Z
RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock
during braking. This limits the steerability
of the vehicle when braking and the braking
distance may increase. There is a risk of
accident.
RIf ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be
stabilized if it starts to skid or a wheel starts
to spin. There is a risk of accident.
You should therefore have all work involving
the battery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
GWARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highly
explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
charging the battery as well as when jump-
starting.
Always make sure that neither you nor the
battery is electrostatically charged. There is
a build-up of electrostatic charge, e.g.:
Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
Rdue to friction between clothing and seats
Rif you push or pull the battery across the
carpet or other synthetic materials
Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth.
GWARNING
During the charging process, a battery
produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit
occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen
gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into
contact with vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a
battery.
RIt is important that you observe the
described order of the battery terminals
when connecting and disconnecting a
battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and
disconnecting the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
GWARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
over the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
water and seek medical attention.
HEnvironmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified
specialist workshop or a
special collection point for
used batteries.
! Have the battery checked regularly at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified
specialist workshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving the
battery carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop. In the exceptional case that it is
286 Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
necessary for you to disconnect the battery
yourself, make sure that:
Ryou switch off the engine and remove the
SmartKey. Check that all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster are off.
Otherwise, electronic components, such
as the alternator, may be damaged.
Ryou first remove the negative terminal
clamp and then the positive terminal
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic
system may be damaged.
Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,
the transmission is locked in position P
after disconnecting the battery. The
vehicle is secured against rolling away.
You can then no longer move the vehicle.
The battery and the cover of the positive
terminal clamp must be installed securely
during operation.
Comply with safety precautions and take
protective measures when handling
batteries.
WARNING
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the
battery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid
contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing.
Wear suitable protective clothing,
in particular gloves, an apron and
a face mask.
Immediately rinse acid splashes
off with clean water. Consult a
doctor if necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use batteries
which have been tested and approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These
batteries provide increased impact
protection to prevent vehicle occupants from
suffering acid burns should the battery be
damaged in the event of an accident.
In order for the battery to achieve the
maximum possible service life, it must always
be sufficiently charged.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
discharge over time if you do not use the
vehicle. In this case, have the battery
disconnected at a qualified specialist
workshop. You can also charge the battery
with a charger recommended by Mercedes-
Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop
for further information.
Have the battery charge level checked more
frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
short trips or if you leave it standing idle for
a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
parked for a long period of time.
Only replace a battery with a battery that has
been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
iRemove the SmartKey if you park the
vehicle and do not require any electrical
consumers. The vehicle will then use very
little energy, thus conserving battery
power.
Battery (vehicle) 287
Breakdown assistance
Z
iIf the power supply has been interrupted,
e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will
have to:
Rset the clock (audio system/COMAND,
see the separate operating instructions).
Rreset the function for folding the exterior
mirrors in/out automatically, by folding
the mirrors out once (Y page 93).
Charging the battery
GWARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery.
GWARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean
over the battery. Keep children away from
batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with
water and seek medical attention.
GWARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at
temperatures below freezing point. When
jump-starting the vehicle or charging the
battery, gases can escape from the battery.
There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
! Only use battery chargers with a
maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (Y page 289).
XOpen the hood (Y page 266).
XConnect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same
order as when connecting the donor
battery in the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 289).
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/
warning lamps in the instrument cluster do
not light up, it is highly likely that the
discharged battery has frozen. In this case
you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor
charge the battery. The service life of a
thawed-out battery may be shorter. The
starting characteristics can be impaired,
particularly at low temperatures. Have the
thawed-out battery checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Only charge the installed battery with a
battery charger which has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. An accessory
battery charge unit specially adapted for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz is available. It
permits the charging of the battery in its
installed position. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information and availability. Read the battery
charger's operating instructions before
charging the battery.
288 Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a
positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment.
GWARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and
seek medical attention.
GWARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
GWARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.
RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
GWARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
GWARNING
Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid
repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not
light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither
jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be
Jump-starting 289
Breakdown assistance
Z
shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have
the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,
the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper
cables. Observe the following points:
RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.
Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the
jumper cables are connected to the battery.
Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine
is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.
XSecure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
XShift the transmission to position P.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
XSwitch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).
XOpen the hood (Y page 266).
290 Jump-starting
Breakdown assistance
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
XPress together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back.
XConnect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.
XStart the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
XConnect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first.
XStart the engine.
XBefore disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
XFirst, remove the jumper cables from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own
vehicle first.
XClose cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables.
XHave the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
iJump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
iJumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any
qualified specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if:
Rthe engine is not running.
Rthe brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning.
Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply
or the vehicle's electrical system.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
force may be necessary to steer or brake.
There is a risk of an accident.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
make sure that the steering moves freely.
GWARNING
If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-
started is greater than the permissible gross
weight of your vehicle:
Rthe towing eye could detach itself
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could
rollover.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
its weight should not be greater than the
permissible gross weight of your vehicle.
Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle
weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate (Y page 328).
GWARNING
The vehicle is braked if the HOLD function is
activated. Therefore, deactivate HOLD if the
vehicle is to be towed.
Towing and tow-starting 291
Breakdown assistance
Z
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could
be damaged.
! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery
purposes as this could damage the vehicle.
If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of
30 mph (50km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the front axle must be
raised or the entire vehicle raised and
transported.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage the vehicle.
! Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be started by tow-starting. This
could otherwise damage the transmission.
It is better to have the vehicle transported
than to have it towed.
When towing a vehicle, the transmission must
be in position N.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock
Rcannot shift the transmission to position
N.
iDeactivate the automatic locking feature
(Y page 198). You could otherwise be
locked out when pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
XRemove the towing eye from the stowage
space.
The towing eye is beneath the cargo
compartment floor with the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 280).
Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing
eye is beneath the tire inflation
compressor.
XPress the mark on cover : inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
XTake cover : off the opening.
XScrew in and tighten the towing eye
clockwise to the stop.
Removing the towing eye
XUnscrew and remove the towing eye.
XAttach cover : to the bumper and press
until it engages.
XPlace the towing eye in the stowage well
beneath the cargo compartment floor
(Y page 280) in the cargo compartment.
XVehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back the
tire inflation compressor.
292 Towing and tow-starting
Breakdown assistance
Towing the vehicle with the front axle
raised
! The ignition must be switched off if the
vehicle is being towed with the front axle
raised. Otherwise, ESP® may intervene and
damage the brake system.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
XShift the automatic transmission to
position P.
XRelease the brake pedal.
XRelease the electric parking brake.
XDeactivate automatic locking
(Y page 198).
XSwitch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 101).
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and leave the SmartKey in the
ignition lock.
When towing your vehicle with the front axle
raised, it is important that you observe the
safety instructions (Y page 291).
Towing a vehicle with both axles on
the ground
GWARNING
The power assistance for the steering and the
brake force booster do not work when the
engine is not running. You will then need
much more effort to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your style of driving
accordingly.
iIn order to signal a change of direction
when towing with the hazard warning lamps
switched on, use the combination switch as
usual. In this case, only the turn signals for
the desired direction flash. When you reset
the combination switch, the hazard
warning lamps start flashing again.
The automatic transmission automatically
shifts to position P when you open the driver's
or front-passenger door or when you remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order
to ensure that the automatic transmission
stays in position N when towing the vehicle,
you must observe the following points:
XMake sure that the vehicle is stationary.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XDepress and hold the brake pedal.
XShift the automatic transmission to
position N.
XLeave the SmartKey in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XRelease the brake pedal.
XRelease the electric parking brake.
XSwitch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 101).
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 291).
Transporting the vehicle
! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels
or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle
such as axle or steering components.
Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
XShift the transmission to position N.
As soon as the vehicle is loaded:
XPrevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the electric parking brake.
XShift the transmission to position P.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove it.
XSecure the vehicle.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
purposes.
Towing and tow-starting 293
Breakdown assistance
Z
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
! Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow-started. You could
otherwise damage the automatic
transmission.
When tow-starting, it is important that you
observe the safety instructions (Y page 291).
Fuses
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher
amperage, the electric cables could be
overloaded. This could result in a fire. There
is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
new fuses having the correct amperage.
! Only use fuses that have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
have the correct fuse rating for the system
concerned. Only use fuses marked with an
"S". Otherwise, components or systems
could be damaged.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the
components on the circuit and their functions
stop operating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognize by
the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
in the fuse allocation chart.
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Before changing a fuse
XSecure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 149).
XSwitch off all electrical consumers.
XTurn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
ignition lock and remove it (Y page 135).
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell
The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in
the front-passenger footwell (Y page 295).
Fuse box in the engine compartment
GWARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it
is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair
the operation of the fuses.
294 Fuses
Breakdown assistance
XOpen the hood.
XUse a dry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
XTo open: open clamps ;.
XFold up cover : in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.
XTo close: check whether the seal is seated
correctly in cover :.
XInsert cover : at the back into openings
= on the fuse box.
XFold down cover :.
XHook clamps ; into the fuse box and
close.
XClose the hood.
Fuse box in the front-passenger
footwell
XTo open: remove the floormat from the
front-passenger side.
XFold out perforated floor covering : in the
direction of the arrow.
XTo release cover =, press retaining
clamp ;.
XFold out cover = in the direction of the
arrow to the catch.
XRemove cover = forwards.
iFuse allocation chart ? is located on the
lower right-hand side of cover =.
XTo close: insert cover = on the left-hand
side of the fuse box into the retainer.
Cover = engages in the retainers.
XFold down cover = until clamps ; lock
audibly.
XFold back perforated floor covering :.
Fuses 295
Breakdown assistance
Z
296
Useful information ............................ 298
Important safety notes .................... 298
Operation ........................................... 298
Winter operation ............................... 300
Tire pressure ..................................... 301
Loading the vehicle .......................... 306
Maximum load rating ....................... 310
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards .......................................... 311
Tire labeling ....................................... 312
Definition of terms for tires and
loading ............................................... 316
Changing a wheel ............................. 319
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 323
Emergency spare wheel ................... 325
297
Wheels and tires
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original
part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmodel
When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct:
Rdesignation
Rmanufacturer
Rmodel
GWARNING
A flat tire severely impairs the driving,
steering and braking characteristics of the
vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
Rdo not drive with a flat tire.
Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
Rpay attention to the information and
warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics).
Accessories that are not approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being
used correctly can impair the operating
safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist
workshop and inquire about:
Rsuitability
Rlegal stipulations
Rfactory recommendations
Information on dimensions and types of
wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found
(Y page 323).
Information on air pressure for the tires on
your vehicle can be found:
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard on the B-pillar
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
flap
Runder "Tire pressure"
iFurther information on wheels and tires
can be obtained at any qualified specialist
workshop.
Operation
Information on driving
RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the
tire pressures and correct them if
necessary.
RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handling
characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side.
This may indicate that the wheels or tires
are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is
defective, reduce your speed immediately.
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
check the wheels and tires for damage.
Hidden tire damage could also be causing
298 Operation
Wheels and tires
the unusual handling characteristics. If you
find no signs of damage, have the wheels
and tires checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that
the tires do not get deformed by the curb
or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive
over curbs, speed humps or similar
elevations, try to do so slowly and at an
obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires,
particularly the sidewalls, may be
damaged.
Regular checking of wheels and tires
GWARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
control of your vehicle. There is a risk of
accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Regularly check the wheels and tires of your
vehicle for damage at least once a month, as
well as after driving off-road or on rough
roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of
tire pressure. Pay particular attention to
damage such as:
Rcuts in the tires
Rpunctures
Rtears in the tires
Rbulges on tires
Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width
of the tire (Y page 299). If necessary, turn
the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect
the inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve other than the
standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
Do not use any other valve caps or systems,
e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires
particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire
pressure as necessary (Y page 301).
The service life of tires depends, among other
things, on the following factors:
RDriving style
RTire pressure
RDistance covered
Tire tread
GWARNING
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
speed is not adapted to suit the driving
conditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
may exhibit different levels of wear at
different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
should regularly check the tread depth and
the condition of the tread across the entire
width of all tires.
Minimum tire tread depth for:
RSummer tires: â in (3 mm)
RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
tire tread depth is reached.
Operation 299
Wheels and tires
Z
Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated
into the tire tread.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
tread. They are visible once the tread depth
is approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the
case, the tire is so worn that it must be
replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same
type and make.
Exception: it is permissible to mount a
different type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 281).
ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto
the wheels.
RAfter mounting new tires, break in them in
at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles
(100 km), as they only reach their full
performance after this distance.
RDo not drive with tires which have too little
tread depth, as this significantly reduces
the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
RReplace the tires after six years at the
latest, regardless of wear.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat
characteristics), you can continue to drive
your vehicle even if there is a total loss of
pressure in one or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in
conjunction with an active tire pressure loss
warning system and only on wheels
specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with
a flat tire (Y page 281).
iVehicles equipped with MOExtended tires
are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the
factory. It is therefore recommended that
you additionally equip your vehicle with a
TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not
feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.
A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a
qualified specialist workshop.
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 319).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tires on your
vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at
very cold temperatures could cause cracks to
form, thereby damaging the tires
permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept
responsibility for this type of damage.
M+S tires
GWARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
and do not provide sufficient traction. There
is a risk of an accident.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã
in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use
winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of
tire are identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking
provide the best possible grip in wintry road
conditions. Only these tires will allow driving
300 Winter operation
Wheels and tires
safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to
function optimally in winter. These tires have
been developed specifically for driving in
snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on
all wheels to maintain safe handling
characteristics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
Once the winter tires are mounted:
XCheck the tire pressures (Y page 305).
XRestart the tire pressure loss warning
system (Y page 305).
For more information on driving with the
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 325).
Snow chains
GWARNING
If snow chains are mounted on the rear
wheels, the snow chains could cause abrasion
to the vehicle body or to chassis components.
This could cause damage to the vehicle or the
tires. There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
Rnever mount snow chains on the rear
wheels
Ronly mount snow chains in pairs on the
front wheels.
! On some tire sizes there is not enough
space for snow chains. To avoid damage to
the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and
tire combinations" section under "Tires and
wheels".
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use snow chains
that have been specially approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a
corresponding standard of quality.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please
bear the following points in mind:
RSnow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible
wheel-tire combinations (Y page 323).
ROnly use snow chains when driving on
roads completely covered by snow.
Remove the snow chains as soon as
possible when you come to a road that is
not snow-covered.
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of
snow chains. Observe the appropriate
regulations if you wish to mount snow
chains.
RDo not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
RWhen snow chains are installed, never use
Active Parking Assist (Y page 172).
iYou may wish to deactivate
ESP®(Y page 62) when pulling away with
snow chains installed. You can thereby
allow the wheels to spin in a controlled
manner, achieving an increased driving
force (cutting action).
For more information on driving with the
emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 325).
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
GWARNING
Tires with tire pressures that are too low or
too high are associated with the following
hazards:
Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is
heavily laden or when driven at high
speeds.
Rthe tires can wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which can severely impair tire
traction.
Rthe driving, steering and braking
characteristics may be severely impaired.
There is a risk of accident.
Tire pressure 301
Wheels and tires
Z
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires
including the spare wheel:
Rmonthly, at least
Rif the load changes
Rbefore beginning a long journey
Runder different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
does not permit any reliable conclusion about
the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with
the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire
pressure can be checked in the on-board
computer.
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
1.) Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the
vehicle (Y page 306).
The Tire and Loading Information placard
contains the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
are valid for the maximum permissible load
and up to the maximum permissible vehicle
speed.
:Recommended tire pressures
Option 2) Tire pressure table on the inside
of the fuel filler flap.
The tire pressure table contains the
recommended pressures for cold tires for
various operating conditions, i.e. differing
load and speed conditions.
iSpecifications shown in the examples of
tire pressure tables are for illustration
purposes only. Tire pressure specifications
are vehicle-specific and may deviate from
the data shown here. Tire pressure
specifications applicable to your vehicle
are located in your vehicle's tire pressure
table.
Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted
for this vehicle by the factory
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire
pressure information following is only valid
for that tire size. The load conditions "partially
laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the
table for different numbers of occupants and
amounts of luggage. The actual number of
seats may differ.
Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and
302 Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
can be found on the tire sidewall
(Y page 313).
If the tire pressures have been set to the
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower
road speeds, the pressures should be reset
to the higher values:
Rif you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds.
iThe tire pressures for increased loads
and/or higher road speeds, shown in the
tire pressure table, may have a negative
effect on driving comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this
can lead to an excessive build up of heat and
a sudden loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Important notes on tire pressure
GWARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
RCheck the tire for foreign objects.
RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
GWARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire
pressure monitors keep the tire valve open.
This can also result in tire pressure loss. There
is a risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the
tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire
does not permit any reliable conclusion about
the tire pressure.
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is
dependent on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire
pressures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold:
Rif the vehicle has been parked without
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
hours and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending on
the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
and the tire load. If the tire temperature
changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/
1.5 psi). Take this into account when
checking the pressure of warm tires. Only
correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the
current operating conditions. If you check the
tire pressure when the tires are warm, the
resulting value will be higher than if the tires
were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the
tire pressure to the value specified for cold
tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be
too low.
Tire pressure 303
Wheels and tires
Z
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of
the fuel filler flap
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflation
GWARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can
overheat and burst as a consequence. In
addition, they also suffer from excessive and/
or irregular wear, which can severely impair
the braking properties and the driving
characteristics. There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may:
Rwear quickly and unevenly
Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Roverheat, leading to tire defects
Rhave an adverse effect on handling
characteristics
Overinflation
GWARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
because they are damaged more easily by
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
severely impair the braking properties and the
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tires may:
Rhave an adverse effect on handling
characteristics
Rwear quickly and unevenly
Rbe more susceptible to damage
Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort
Rincrease the braking distance
Maximum tire pressures
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the
recommended tire pressure for your vehicle
when adjusting the tire pressure
(Y page 301).
:Example: maximum permissible tire
pressure
iThe actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
Observe the "Tire pressure information"
section (Y page 301).
Information on air pressure for the tires on
your vehicle can be found:
Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard on the B-pillar
Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
flap
Rin the "Tire pressure information" section
304 Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire
pressure, proceed as follows:
XRemove the valve cap of the tire that is to
be checked.
XPress the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
XRead the tire pressure and compare it with
the recommended value on the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the
B-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle.
XIf necessary, increase the tire pressure to
the recommended value (Y page 301).
XIf the tire pressure is too high, release air
by pressing down the metal pin in the valve
using the tip of a pen, for example. Then,
check the tire pressure again using the tire
pressure gauge.
XScrew the valve cap onto the valve.
XRepeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure loss warning system
Important safety notes
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire
pressure loss warning system monitors the
set tire pressure using the rotational speed of
the wheels. This enables the system to detect
significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
message will appear in the multifunction
display.
The tire pressure warning system does not
warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.
Observe the notes on the recommended tire
pressure (Y page 301).
The tire pressure loss warning system does
not replace the need to regularly check your
vehicle's tire pressures, since an even loss of
pressure on several tires at the same time
cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss
warning system.
The tire pressure loss warning system is not
able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure,
e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign
object. In the event of a sudden loss of
pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking
carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if:
Rsnow chains are mounted to your vehicle's
tires.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style
(cornering at high speeds or driving with
high rates of acceleration).
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
vehicle or on the roof).
Restarting the tire pressure loss
warning system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
if you have:
Rchanged the tire pressure
Rchanged the wheels or tires
Rmounted new wheels or tires
XBefore restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires
for the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressures can be
found in the table on the fuel filler flap.
The tire pressure loss warning system can
only give reliable warnings if you have set
the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire
pressure is set, these incorrect values will
be monitored.
XObserve the notes on tire pressure
(Y page 301).
XMake sure that the SmartKey is in
position 2 (Y page 135) in the ignition lock.
Tire pressure 305
Wheels and tires
Z
XPress = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the Service menu.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure.
XPress the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Active
Press 'OK' to Restart message
appears in the multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
XPress the a button.
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears in the multifunction display.
XPress the 9 or : button to select
Yes.
XPress the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
message appears in the multifunction
display.
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
loss warning system will monitor the set
tire pressures of all four tires.
or
If you wish to cancel the restart:
XPress the % button.
or
XIf the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears, use the 9 or : button to
select Cancel.
XPress the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
GWARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
:B-pillar, driver's side
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show
the maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Tire and Loading Information placard
shows the maximum permissible number
of occupants and the maximum
permissible vehicle load. It also contains
details of the tire sizes and
corresponding pressures for tires
mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle
occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You
can also find information about the
maximum gross axle weight rating on the
front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never
exceed the maximum load or the
maximum gross axle weight rating for the
front or rear axle.
306 Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating
XSpecification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the specified
value.
iThe specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the
illustration are examples. The maximum
permissible load is vehicle-specific and
may deviate from the data shown here. The
maximum permissible load that applies for
your vehicle can be found on your vehicle's
Tire and Loading Information placard.
Number of seats
Maximum number of seats : indicates the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
iThe specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the
illustration are examples. The number of
seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from
the details shown. The number of seats in
your vehicle can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
XStep 1: Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
placard.
XStep 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
XStep 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX lbs.
XStep 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbs and there are five
occupants in the vehicle each with a weight
of 150 lbs, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400
Ò 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
XStep 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
Loading the vehicle 307
Wheels and tires
Z
will be transferred to your vehicle. Refer to
this Operator's Manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle
(Y page 310).
308 Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you
are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading
Information placard (Y page 307).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Step 1 Combined maximum
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Step 2 Number of people in
the vehicle (driver
and occupants)
5 3 1
Distribution of the
occupants
Front: 2
Rear: 3
Front: 1
Rear: 2
Front: 1
Weight of the
occupants
Occupant 1:
150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg)
Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Occupant 1:
200 lbs (91 kg)
Occupant 2:
190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3:
150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 1:
150 lbs (68 kg)
Gross weight of all
occupants
750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Loading the vehicle 309
Wheels and tires
Z
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Step 3 Permissible load and
trailer load/
noseweight
(maximum
permissible load
rating from the Tire
and Loading
Information placard
minus the gross
weight of all
occupants)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
Ò750 lbs
(340 kg) =
750 lbs (340 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
Ò540 lbs
(245 kg) =
960 lbs (435 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg)
Ò150 lbs (68 kg)
= 1350 lbs
(612 kg)
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo
carefully, you should still make sure that the
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can
be found on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 306).
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the
gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,
load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum
permissible weight that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross
vehicle weight and maximum gross axle
weight rating), have your loaded vehicle
(including driver, occupants, cargo, and full
trailer load if applicable) weighed on a
suitable vehicle weighbridge.
Trailer load/noseweight
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,
the trailer load/noseweight is included in the
load along with occupants and luggage. The
trailer load/noseweight is usually between
10% and 15% of the gross weight of the trailer
and its load.
Maximum load rating
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum
permissible load can be found on the
vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(Y page 306).
Maximum tire load : is the maximum
permissible weight for which the tire is
approved.
iThe actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
310 Maximum load rating
Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading
Standards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
U.S. government specifications. Their
purpose is to provide drivers with uniform
reliable information on tire performance data.
Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using
three performance factors: tread wear :,
tire traction ;, and heat resistance =.
These regulations do not apply to Canada.
Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America
are provided with the corresponding quality
grading markings on the sidewall of the tire.
All passenger car tires must conform to the
statutory safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Where applicable, the tire grading
information can be found on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and maximum
tire width.
iThe actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
For example:
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200 AA A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. government course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm, due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate conditions.
Traction
GWARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road
surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around
the freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum
tread depth of ã in (4 mm) for all four winter
tires (Y page 300) to maintain normal driving
characteristics in winter. Winter tires can
reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 311
Wheels and tires
Z
not covered with ice or snow. Take
appropriate care when driving.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage
to the drive train.
Temperature
GWARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C. These represent the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Tire labeling
Overview of tire labeling
The following markings are on the tire in addition
to the tire name (sales designation) and the
manufacturer's name:
:Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard
(Y page 316)
;DOT, Tire Identification Number
(Y page 315)
=Maximum tire load (Y page 310)
?Maximum tire pressure (Y page 304)
AManufacturer
BTire material (Y page 316)
CTire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed index (Y page 313)
DLoad index (Y page 315)
ETire name
iTire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
312 Tire labeling
Wheels and tires
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
:Tire width
;Nominal aspect ratio in %
=Tire code
?Rim diameter
ALoad bearing index
BSpeed rating
iTire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall
may not contain any letters or may contain
one letter that precedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size
description (as shown above): these are
passenger vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.
manufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these
are light truck tires according to U.S.
manufacturing standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: these are
compact emergency spare wheels at high tire
pressure, to be used only temporarily in an
emergency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
tire width in millimeters.
Nominal aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the
size ratio between the tire height and the tire
width and is shown in percent. The aspect
ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by
the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents
diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial
tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter
of the rim flange. The rim diameter is
specified in inches (in).
Load bearing index: load bearing index A
is a numerical code which specifies the
maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum
permissible load can be found on the
vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(Y page 306).
Example:
A load-bearing index of 91 indicates a
maximum load of 1,356lb (615kg) that can be
carried by the tires. For further information on
the maximum tire load in kilograms and
pounds, see (Y page 310).
For further information on the load-bearing
index, see Load index (Y page 315).
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
approved maximum speed of the tire.
GWARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing
capacity and the approved maximum speed
could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.
There is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
Regardless of the speed rating, always
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and
Tire labeling 313
Wheels and tires
Z
adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions.
Summer tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) over 186mph (300 km/h)
ZR over 149mph (240 km/h)
ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
The service specifications consist of load
bearing index A and speed rating B.
RIf the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there are no service
specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in
order to find out the maximum speed.
If a service specification is available, the
maximum speed is limited according to the
speed rating in the service specification.
Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this
example, "97 Y" is the service specification.
The letter "Y" represents the speed rating
and the maximum speed of the tire is
limited to 186 mph (300km/h).
RThe size description for all tires with
maximum speeds of over 186mph
(300km/h) must include "ZR", and the
service specification must be given in
brackets. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y).
The speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the
maximum speed of the tire is over 186mph
(300km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer
about the maximum speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S6up to 100mph (160 km/h)
T M+S6up to 118mph (190 km/h)
H M+S6up to 130mph (210 km/h)
V M+S6up to 149mph (240 km/h)
iNot all tires with the M+S marking provide
the driving characteristics of winter tires.
Winter tires have, in addition to the M+S
identification, the i snow flake symbol
on the tire sidewall. Tires with this marking
fulfill the requirements of the Rubber
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC)
regarding the tire traction on snow. They
have been especially developed for driving
on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph
(210km/h).
The speed rating of tires mounted at the
factory may be higher than the maximum
speed that the electronic speed limiter
permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (Y page 323).
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
workshop.
6Or M+Si for winter tires.
314 Tire labeling
Wheels and tires
Load index
In addition to the load bearing index, load
index : may be imprinted after the letters
that identify speed index B(Y page 313) on
the sidewall of the tire.
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard
load (SL) tire
RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
tire
RLight Load: represents a light load tire
RC, D, E: represents a load range that
depends on the maximum load that the tire
can carry at a certain pressure
iTire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Canadian tire regulations prescribe that every
new tire manufacturer or retreader has to
imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire
produced.
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN makes it easier for tire manufacturers or
retreaders to notify customers of recalls or
other safety-related matters. It makes it
possible for the purchaser to easily identify
the affected tires.
The TIN consists of the manufacturer
identification code ;, tire size =, tire type
code ? and manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : indicates that the tire complies
with the requirements of the Canadian
Transport Ministry.
Manufacturer identification code:
manufacturer identification code ; provides
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded
tires have a code with four symbols.
Further information about retreaded tires
(Y page 298).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be
used by the manufacturer as a code to
describe specific characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
A provides information about the age of a
tire. The first and second positions represent
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
for the first calendar week. Positions three
and four represent the year of manufacture.
For example, a tire that is marked with
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
2008.
iTire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
Tire labeling 315
Wheels and tires
Z
Tire characteristics
This information describes the tire cord and
the number of layers in sidewall : and under
tire tread ;.
iTire data is vehicle-specific and may
deviate from the data in the example.
Definition of terms for tires and
loading
Tire ply composition and material
used
Describes the number of plies or the number
of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
nylon, polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure.
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and
100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
1 bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of
the Canadian Transport Ministry.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the
vehicle is designed multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lb).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction
and temperature characteristics. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
Recommended tire pressure
The recommended tire pressure applies to
the tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard
contains the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the
recommended pressures for cold tires for
various operating conditions, i.e. differing
load and speed conditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to
optional equipment
This is the combined weight of all standard
and optional equipment available for the
vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually
installed on the vehicle or not.
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire
is mounted.
316 Definition of terms for tires and loading
Wheels and tires
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The
gross axle weight rating can be found on the
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side.
Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire
identification. It specifies the speed range for
which the tire is approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight
of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
wheel, accessories installed, occupants,
luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if
applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not
exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR
as specified on the vehicle identification plate
on the B-pillar on the driver's side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
the vehicle including all accessories,
occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar
noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
weight rating is specified on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of:
Rthe curb weight of the vehicle
Rthe weight of the accessories
Rthe load limit
Rthe weight of the factory installed optional
equipment
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa
corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire
pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the
equivalent of 1 bar.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall
of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing
capacity more precisely.
Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-
conditioning system and optional equipment
if these are installed in the vehicle, but does
not include passengers or luggage.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load rating in kilograms or
pounds is the maximum weight for which a
tire is approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one
tire.
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle
by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Definition of terms for tires and loading 317
Wheels and tires
Z
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire
width in percent.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an
outward force to each square inch of the tire's
surface. The tire pressure is specified in
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only
be corrected when the tires are cold.
Tire pressure of cold tires
The tires are cold:
Rif the vehicle has been parked without
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
hours and
Rif the vehicle has not been driven further
than 1 mile (1.6 km)
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
securely on the wheel. There are several steel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
coming loose from the wheel rim.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
part and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
optional extras, such as high-performance
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-
performance battery, are not included in the
curb weight and the weight of the
accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is a unique identifier which can be used
by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
example for a product recall, and thus identify
the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
type code and the manufacturing date.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a
code that contains the maximum load bearing
capacity of a tire.
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the
tires and the road surface.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are
distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread
is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in
(1.6 mm) has been reached.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
their designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Nominal load and luggage load plus
68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the
number of seats in the vehicle.
318 Definition of terms for tires and loading
Wheels and tires
Changing a wheel
Flat tire
You can find information on what to do in the
event of a flat tire in the "Flat tire" section
(Y page 281). You will also find information
on driving with MOExtended tires in the event
of a flat tire.
Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in
the event of a flat tire, the emergency spare
wheel is mounted as described under
"Mounting a wheel" (Y page 319).
Rotating the wheels
GWARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of
accident.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes when changing a wheel
(Y page 319).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
in the center.
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
can rotate the wheels according to the
intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
book in your vehicle documents. If no
warranty book is available, the tires should be
interchanged every 3,000 to 6,000 miles
(5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear
requires. Do not change the direction of
wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
is interchanged. Check the tire pressure and,
if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss
warning system.
Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation
have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
of hydroplaning. You will only gain these
benefits if the correct direction of rotation is
maintained.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
its correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the
tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Cleaning the wheels
GWARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced
immediately.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
XStop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
XApply the electric parking brake manually
(Y page 150).
XBring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.
XMove the DIRECT SELECT lever to position
P.
Changing a wheel 319
Wheels and tires
Z
XSwitch off the engine.
XRemove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
XIf included in the vehicle equipment,
remove the tire-change tool kit from the
vehicle.
XSecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(Y page 280).
The folding wheel chock is an additional
safety measure to prevent the vehicle from
rolling away, for example when changing a
wheel.
XFold both plates upwards :.
XFold out lower plate ;.
XGuide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
the openings in base plate =.
Securing the vehicle on level ground
XOn level ground: place chocks or other
suitable items under the front and rear of
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the
wheel you wish to change.
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients
XOn light downhill gradients: place
chocks or other suitable items in front of
the wheels of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle
GWARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the
jack must be positioned vertically, directly
under the jacking point of the vehicle.
The following must be observed when
raising the vehicle:
Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-
specific jack that has been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used
incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the
vehicle raised.
Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed. It is not suited for
performing maintenance work under the
vehicle.
Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and
downhill slopes.
320 Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from
rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks. Never
disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is raised.
Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a
large, load-bearing underlay must be used.
On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay
must be used, e.g. rubber mats.
Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar
objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the
jack will not be able to achieve its load-
bearing capacity due to the restricted
height.
Rmake sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does
not exceed 1.2 inches (3 cm).
Rnever place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.
Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Rnever open or close a door or the trunk lid
when the vehicle is raised.
Rmake sure that no persons are present in
the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
! The jack is designed exclusively for
jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.
XUsing lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on
the wheel you wish to change by about one
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
completely.
The jacking points are located just behind the
wheel housings of the front wheels and just
in front of the wheel housings of the rear
wheels (arrows).
XTake the ratchet wrench out of the tire-
changing tool kit and place it on the
hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters
AUF are visible.
XPosition jack = at jacking point ;.
XMake sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
Changing a wheel 321
Wheels and tires
Z
XTurn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits
completely on jacking point ; and the
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
XTurn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is
raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground.
Removing a wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
you screw them in.
XUnscrew the wheel bolts.
XRemove the wheel.
Mounting a new wheel
GWARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event
of damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
GWARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (Y page 319).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety
reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
XClean the wheel and wheel hub contact
surfaces.
XPlace the new wheel on the wheel hub and
push it on.
XTighten the wheel bolts until they are
finger-tight.
Lowering the vehicle
GWARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
322 Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
XPlace the ratchet wrench onto the hexagon
nut of the jack so that the letters AB are
visible.
XTurn the ratchet wrench until the vehicle is
once again standing firmly on the ground.
XPlace the jack to one side.
XTighten the wheel bolts evenly in a
crosswise pattern in the sequence
indicated (: to A). The tightening torque
must be 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
XTurn the jack back to its initial position.
XStow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
tools in the vehicle again.
XCheck the tire pressure of the newly
mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 301).
Wheel and tire combinations
General notes
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you only use tires and
wheels which have been approved by
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your
vehicle.
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS
or ESP®, and are marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only
certain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
may only be used on wheels that have been
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,
vehicle noise emissions or fuel
consumption, may otherwise be adversely
affected. In addition, when driving with a
load, tire dimension variations could cause
the tires to come into contact with the
bodywork and axle components. This could
result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
damage resulting from the use of tires,
wheels or accessories other than those
tested and approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop.
! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
previous damage cannot always be
detected on retreaded tires. As a result,
Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle
safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do
not mount used tires if you have no
information about their previous usage.
Overview of abbreviations used in the
following tire tables:
RBA: both axles
RFA: front axle
RRA: rear axle
The recommended pressures for various
operating conditions can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
with the recommended tire pressures on
the B-pillar on the driver's side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of
the fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire
pressures under various operating conditions
(Y page 301).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the
maintenance recommendations of the tire
manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.
Wheel and tire combinations 323
Wheels and tires
Z
Notes on the vehicle equipment – always
equip the vehicle with:
Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/
right)
Rthe same type of tires at a given time
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install a
different type or make in the event of a flat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" section
(Y page 281).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you
additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT
kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-
flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit
may be obtained from a qualified specialist
workshop.
iThe following pages contain information
on approved wheel rim and tire sizes for
equipping your vehicle with winter tires.
Winter tires are not available at the factory
as standard equipment or optional extras.
If you want to equip your vehicle with
approved winter tires, it may be necessary
to obtain wheel rims in the corresponding
size. The size of the approved winter tires
may differ from the standard tires. This is
dependent on the model and the
equipment installed at the factory.
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
information, can be obtained at a qualified
specialist workshop.
In the following table, the wheel/tire
combinations are assigned to the vehicle
models through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:
V1 B 2507
iNot all wheel and tire combinations are
available at the factory for all countries.
7BlueEFFICIENCY
324 Wheel and tire combinations
Wheels and tires
Tires
Summer tires Alloy wheels V1
BA 225/40 R18 92 W XL MOExtended8, 9 7.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)
#
All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1
BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+SMOExtended8, 9 7.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 2.07 in (52.5 mm)
#
Winter tires Alloy wheels V1
BA 205/50 R17 93 H XL M+Si6.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)
#
BA 205/50 R17 93 H XL
M+SiMOExtended9
6.5 J x 17 H2
Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm)
#
Emergency spare wheel
Important safety notes
GWARNING
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type
of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel
and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may
severely impair the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
Radapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or
emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size briefly.
Rdo not switch ESP® off.
Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size replaced at the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
as well as the tire type must be correct.
When using an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a different size, you must not
exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Snow chains must not be mounted on
emergency spare wheels.
General notes
You should regularly check the pressure of
the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior
to long trips, and correct the pressure as
necessary (Y page 301). The value on the
wheel or as given in the "Technical data"
section (Y page 323) is valid.
iWhen you are driving with the emergency
spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure
loss warning system cannot function
reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
8Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
9MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) only in conjunction with activated tire pressure loss
warning.
Emergency spare wheel 325
Wheels and tires
Z
warning system when the defective wheel
has been replaced with a new wheel.
An emergency spare wheel may also be
mounted against the direction of rotation.
Observe the time restriction on use as well as
the speed limitation specified on the
emergency spare wheel.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
Removing the emergency spare wheel
XOpen the tailgate.
XLoosen lashing straps ; on emergency
spare wheel bag :.
XRemove emergency spare wheel bag :
with the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel.
For further information on changing and
mounting a wheel, see (Y page 319).
Technical data
"Minispare"
emergency spare
wheel
Tires Steel wheel
T 125/80 R17 99 M
Tire pressure: 420 kPa
(4.2 bar/61 psi)
3.5 B x 17 H2
ET 19.5
326 Emergency spare wheel
Wheels and tires
Useful information ............................ 328
Information regarding technical
data .................................................... 328
Warranty ............................................ 328
Identification plates ......................... 328
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ..................................................... 329
Vehicle data ...................................... 335
327
Technical data
Useful information
iThis Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional
equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Manual. Country-specific differences are
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety-
related systems and functions.
iRead the information on qualified
specialist workshops: (Y page 24).
Information regarding technical data
iThe data stated here specifically refers to
a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the data for all vehicle variants and trim
levels.
Warranty
The Service and Warranty Information
booklet contains detailed information about
the warranties covering your vehicle.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
REmission System Warranty
REmission Performance Warranty
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Control System Warranty
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Accessories warranties. You can obtain
information about this from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
iShould you lose your Service and
Warranty Information booklet, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange
for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with
vehicle identification number (VIN)
XOpen the driver's door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Example: vehicle identification plate
;VIN
=Paint code
iThe data shown on the vehicle
identification plate is used only as an
example. This data is different for every
vehicle and can deviate from the data
shown here. You can find the data
328 Identification plates
Technical data
applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
identification plate.
VIN
XSlide the right-hand front seat to its
rearmost position.
XFold up floor covering : in front of the
right-hand front seat.
You will see VIN ;.
The VIN can also be found in the following
locations:
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 329)
Ron the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 328)
Engine number
:Emissions control information plate
;Engine number (stamped into the
crankcase)
=VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Service products and filling
capacities
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Service products may be poisonous and
hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
HEnvironmental note
Dispose of service products in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
RFuels
RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
RCoolant
RBrake fluid
RWindshield washer fluid
RClimate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must be
matched. You should therefore only use
products that have been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz.
Information about tested and approved
products can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved
by Mercedes-Benz by the following
inscription on the containers:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations
indicate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.
MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Service products and filling capacities 329
Technical data
Z
Fuel
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and
explosion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
GWARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
RWash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance
without delay.
RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical
assistance without delay. Do not induce
vomiting.
RImmediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
Model Total
capacity
B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY 13.2 US gal
(50.0 l)
Model Of which
reserve
B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY Approx.
1.6 US gal
(6.0 l)
Gasoline
Fuel grade
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the
ignition if you accidentally refuel with the
wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter
the fuel system. Even small amounts of the
wrong fuel could result in damage to the
fuel system and the engine. The repair
costs are high. Notify a qualified specialist
workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel
lines drained completely.
! You should only refuel with unleaded
premium-grade gasoline as this avoids
damaging the catalytic converter.
If engine running problems are apparent,
have the cause checked immediately and
repaired. Excess unburned fuel can
otherwise enter the catalytic converter,
leading to overheating and possibly
causing a fire.
! To ensure the longevity and full
performance of the engine, only premium-
grade unleaded gasoline may be used.
If there is no premium-grade unleaded
gasoline available and regular unleaded
gasoline must be used, please observe the
following precautions:
Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with
regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest
with premium-grade unleaded gasoline
as soon as possible.
Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.
Ravoid sudden acceleration.
330 Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Rif the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g.
two passengers without luggage, do not
allow the engine to rev above 3000 rpm.
Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is being
operated in mountainous terrain, do not
depress the accelerator pedal further
than Ô of the pedal travel.
Only refuel using premium-grade unleaded
gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91.
Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/or
unleaded gasoline with additives can be used.
The concentration of additives in the fuel,
however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.:
REthanol
RTAME
RETBE
RIPA
RTBA
For MTBE, the concentration should not
exceed 15%.
The concentration of methanol in gasoline,
including other additives, must not exceed
3%.
Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not
permitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanol
and 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used.
All of these blends must fulfill the fuel
requirements, e.g.:
Rknock resistance
Rboiling point
Rvapor pressure
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the
label on the pump, ask the staff for
assistance.
iFor more information, contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Information on refueling (Y page 147).
Additives
! Operating the engine with fuel additives
can increase wear and tear to the fuel
system high-pressure pump and lead to
contamination of the entire fuel system.
The repair costs are high. This does not
include additives for the removal and
prevention of residue buildup. gasoline
must only be mixed with additives
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. More
information about recommended additives
can be obtained from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
One of the main problems of poor fuel quality
is the forming of deposits that are created
during the gasoline combustion process.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
branded fuels that have additives.
If you use fuels without these additives over
a longer period of time, carbon deposits may
build up. These deposits form at the inlet
valves and in the combustion chamber in
particular.
This could lead to engine problems, e.g.:
Rlonger engine warm-up phase
Runeven idle
Rengine noise
Rmisfiring
Rloss of power
Carbon deposits may form if the availability
of gasoline with relevant additives is
insufficient (in certain regions). In this case,
Mercedes-Benz recommends additives
approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles;
see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
For a list of approved products, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Comply
with the instructions for use on the product
label.
Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. This
causes unnecessary costs and could damage
the engine.
Service products and filling capacities 331
Technical data
Z
Engine oil
General notes
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a
specification other than is necessary to
fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do
not change the engine oil or oil filter in
order to achieve longer replacement
intervals than those prescribed. You could
otherwise cause engine damage or damage
to the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
Follow the instructions in the service
interval display regarding the oil change.
Otherwise, you may damage the engine and
the exhaust gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the
important safety notes on service products
(Y page 329).
The engine oils are matched to the
performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and
service intervals. You should therefore only
use engine oils and oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with maintenance
systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Model Engine
model
MB
Approval
B 250
BlueEFFICIENCY
270 229.5
iMB approval is indicated on the oil
containers.
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Model Capacity
B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY 5.9 US qt (5.6 l)
Additives
! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine.
Engine oil viscosity
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
means that it is thin.
Select an engine oil with an SAE classification
(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside
temperatures. The table shows you which
SAE classifications are to be used. The low-
temperature characteristics of engine oils
can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result
of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore
strongly recommended that you carry out
regular oil changes using an approved engine
oil with the appropriate SAE classification.
Brake fluid
GWARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
332 Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
When handling brake fluid, observe the
important safety notes on service products
(Y page 329).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can
be obtained at any qualified specialist
workshop or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
iHave the brake fluid renewed regularly at
a qualified specialist workshop.
Coolant
Important safety notes
GWARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add
antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not
spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly
clean the antifreeze from components before
starting the engine.
! Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be
found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
for Service Products, MB Specifications for
Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the
Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
even in countries where high temperatures
prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
When handling coolant, observe the
important safety notes on service products
(Y page 329).
The coolant is a mixture of water and
antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs
the following tasks:
Rcorrosion protection
Rantifreeze protection
Rraising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the
coolant during operation is approximately
266 ‡ (130 †).
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the engine cooling system
should:
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat
will not be dissipated as effectively.
If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal
amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion
inhibitor.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in
accordance with MB Specifications for
Service Products 310.1.
The coolant is checked with every
maintenance interval at a qualified specialist
workshop.
iWhen the vehicle is first delivered, it is
filled with a coolant mixture that ensures
adequate antifreeze and corrosion
protection.
Filling capacities
Model Capacity
B 250
BlueEFFICIENCY
Approx. 8.2 US qt
(7.8 l)
Service products and filling capacities 333
Technical data
Z
iUse antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
according to MB approval 325.0 or 326.0.
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system
Important safety notes
GWARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If it comes into contact with hot
engine components or the exhaust system it
could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer
concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or
MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid
could damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to
the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the
level sensor may be damaged.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
When handling washer fluid, observe the
important safety notes on service products
(Y page 329).
At temperatures above freezing:
XFill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.
MB SummerFit.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
XFill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB
WinterFit.
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside
temperature.
RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB
WinterFit with 2 parts water.
RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB
WinterFit with 1 part water.
RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB
WinterFit with 1 part water.
iAdd windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer
fluid all year round.
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
Type of refrigerant
The instruction label about types of
refrigerants can be found on the radiator
cross member.
Refrigerant R-134a
! Only use refrigerant R-134a and PAG oil
(part number A0019890803) which has
been approved by Mercedes-Benz. The
approved R-134a PAG oil may not be mixed
with other conventional PAG oils.
Otherwise, the climate control system may
be damaged.
Service work, such as topping-up refrigerant
or replacing components, may only be carried
out by a qualified specialist workshop. All
applicable regulations must be adhered to,
SAE standard J639 included.
Always have work on the climate control
system carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
334 Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Refrigerant instruction label
Example: refrigerant instruction label
:Warning symbol
;Refrigerant filling capacity
=Applicable SAE standards
?PAG oil part number
AType of refrigerant
Warning symbols : indicate:
Rpossible dangers
Rthat it is necessary to have maintenance
work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop
Filling capacities
All models Capacity
Refrigerant 650 ± 10 g
(22.9 ± 0.4 oz)
PAG oil 120 g
(4.2 oz)
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle
data:
Rthe heights specified may vary as a result
of:
-tires
-load
-condition of the suspension
-optional equipment
Dimensions and weights
Model :
Maximum
headroom
;
Opening
height
B 250
BlueEFFICIEN
CY
73.8 in
(1874 mm)
78.0 in
(1981 mm)
B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY
Vehicle length 171.6 in
(4359 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
79.1 in
(2010 mm)
Vehicle height 61.3 in
(1558 mm)
Wheelbase 106.3 in
(2699 mm)
Vehicle data 335
Technical data
Z
B 250 BlueEFFICIENCY
Turning radius 36.1 ft
(11.0 m)
Maximum roof
load
165 lb
(75.0 kg)
336 Vehicle data
Technical data
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or
suggestions you may have regarding this
Operator's Manual to the technical
documentation team at the following
address:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated
or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from Daimler AG.
As at 25.05.2012
Order no. 6515 1729 13 Part no. 246 584 00 00 Edition D 2013
É2465840000bËÍ
2465840000
Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only

Navigation menu